Polaris Outlaw 500 2006 2007 Service Manual
User Manual: 2006 - 2007 Polaris Outlaw 500 Service Manual
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 202
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Fix it like a Pro GENERAL INFORMATION 1 MAINTENANCE 2 ENGINE 3 FUEL SYSTEM 4 BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION 5 BRAKES 6 ELECTRICAL 7 WIRE DIAGRAMS 8 GENERAL INFORMATION CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION 1 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 MODEL IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 ENGINE DESIGNATION NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 VIN IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 UNIT SERIAL NUMBER (VIN) LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 VEHICLE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 PAINT CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 REPLACEMENT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 PUBLICATION NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 STANDARD TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 2006-2007 OUTLAW 500. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 ‘WHERE USED’ TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 SPECIAL TOOL LISTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7 MISC. NUMBERS / CHARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10 SAE TAP / DRILL SIZES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10 METRIC TAP / DRILL SIZES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10 DECIMAL EQUIVALENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10 COVERSION TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11 GLOSSARY OF TERMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12 1.1 GENERAL INFORMATION VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION Engine Serial Number Location Model Identification This information can be found on the clutch housing on the right side of engine. (2) The machine model number must be used with any correspondence regarding warranty or service. } } } } Machine Model Number Identification A 07 GP 50 AA Emissions & Model Option Year Designation Basic Chassis Designation Engine Designation Engine Designation Number ES50PLE - Single, Water Cooled, Electric Start, 5-Speed Manual, DOHC 4 Stroke. VEHICLE INFORMATION VIN Identification Paint Codes World Mfg. ID Vehicle Descriptor Vehicle Identifier } } 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 4 X A G P 5 0 A * 7 P 0 0 0 0 0 0 Emissions Body Style Engine Model Year Check Digit* Individual Serial Number Plant No* PAINTED PART Frame Frame COLOR Cloud Silver Matte Black POLARIS P-385 P-458 Replacement Keys Powertrain * -This could be either a number or a letter Unit Serial Number (VIN) Location Whenever corresponding with Polaris about a particular issue, the machine model number and serial number are important for vehicle identification. The machine serial number is stamped on the left side of the frame tube. (1) 1.2 Replacement keys can be made from the original key. To identify which series the key is, take the first two digits on the original key and refer to the chart to the right for the proper part number. Should both keys become lost, replacement of the ignition switch assembly is necessary. SERIES # PART NUMBER 20 4010278 21 4010278 22 4010321 23 4010321 27 4010321 28 4010321 31 4110141 32 4110148 67 4010278 68 4010278 RepairPro Service Manual GENERAL INFORMATION 1 Standard Torque Specifications The following torque specifications are to be used as a general guideline. FOR SPECIFIC TORQUE VALUES OF FASTENERS, refer to exploded views in the appropriate section. There are exceptions in the steering, suspension, and engine sections. 1.3 GENERAL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS MODEL: 2006- 2007 OUTLAW 500 MODEL NUMBER: A06(07)GP50AA,AB ENGINE MODEL: ES500PLE041 Category Dimension Length 71.5 in. / 182 cm Width 47.5 in. / 121 cm Height 45 in. / 114 cm Minimum Turing Radius 67 in. / 170 cm Wheel Base 51 in. / 130 cm Ground Clearance 11.5 in. / 29 cm Dry Weight 439 lbs. / 199 kg Gross Vehicle Weight 645 lbs. / 292 kg Oil Capacity 2 qts. / 1.9 ltr Coolant Capacity 2.25 qts. / 2.1 ltr Fuel Capacity 3.25 gal. / 12.3 ltr 1.4 RepairPro Service Manual GENERAL INFORMATION 2006 - 2007 OUTLAW 500 MODEL NUMBER: A06(07)GP50AA,AB ENGINE MODEL: ES500PLE041 Engine Platform Fuji DOHC 4 stroke Engine Model Number ES500PLE041 Engine Displacement 499cc Number of Cylinders 1 Bore & Stroke (mm) 99.2 x 64.6 mm Compression Ratio 10.8:1 Compression Pressure 130 psi Engine Idle Speed Liquid Thermostat Opening Temperature 160°F (71°C) Overheat Warning High Temp Light Lubrication Pressurized Dry Sump Oil Requirements PS-4 Synthetic Exhaust System 2 to 1 canister style Carburetion Carburetor model Mikuni BSR 42mm Main Jet Pilot Jet Jet Needle 13 mm (0.51") Fuel Delivery Fuel Pump Fuel Requirement 87 Octane (minimum) Electrical Alternator Output 200 w @ 3000 RPM Voltage Regulator 3-Phase Main Headlights Tail Brake Neutral / Hot / Reverse Dual Beam 35 watts / 35 watts LED 26.9 watts Wet Multi Plate Clutch Lever Freeplay 1/8” – 3/16” / 3.1 – 4.7 mm Steering / Suspension Front Suspension Style / Shock Dual A-arm / RydeFX™ Shock Front Travel 10 in. / 25.4 cm Independent A-Arm / RydeFX™ Compression Adjustable Shock Rear Suspension Style / Shock Rear Travel 11 in. / 27.94 cm Ground Clearance 11.5 in. / 29 cm Shock Preload Adjustment Front and Rear 67 in. / 170 cm Wheels / Brakes Front Wheel Size / Offset / Bolt Pattern 10x5 / 28.3mm - 4/156 Rear Wheel Size / Offset / Bolt Pattern 9x8 / 58.8mm - 4/110 Front Tire Make / Model / Size Dunlop / Radial / 21x7-10 Rear Tire Make / Model / Size Dunlop / Radial / 20x10-9 Recommended Air Pressure F/R Hydraulic Disc Brake - Rear Hydraulic Disc JETTING CHART AMBIENT TEMPERATURE NGK DCPR8E/ .035 in./ 0.9 mm Electric - Standard Below 40o F Below 5o C +40o F + Above +5o C + Above 0-1800 (0-6000) 150 145 above 1800 (above 6000) 142.5 137.5 Altitude 30o + 3o BTDC @ 3500 RPM Main-15 / Fan-10 / Ignition-5 5 psi Front 5 psi Rear Brake - Front 9100 ± 100 / Reverse 5000 ± 100 Circuit Breakers (Amps) Threaded shock adjustment with Spanner Wrench 0 - 1/16 in / .0 - .159 mm 1 watt (ea.) Maintenance-Free 9 Amp Hr Instrument Cluster 520 O-ring / 1/4-3/8” (6-8mm) Clutch Type DC/CDI Ignition Battery / Model / Amp Hr Starting Chain Size / Deflection 37.5 Float Height Spark plug / Gap 2.43 1.61 1.29 1.09 0.92 2.07 6GL68-40-2 O-0 Ignition Timing Gear Ratio : 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th Rev Toe Out 2.5 Turns Out (Reference Only) RPM Limit 38 Turning Radius Pilot Screw Ignition System 14 Rear Sprocket - # Tooth 145 Needle Jet 1 Manual 5 speed Main Sprocket - # Tooth 1600 Rpm Cooling System Lights : Drivetrain Transmission Type Meters (Feet) N/A 1.5 GENERAL INFORMATION SPECIAL TOOLS ‘Where Used’ Table PART NUMBER TOOL DESCRIPTION CHAPTER TOOL USED IN 8712100 or 8712500 Tachometer 2,7 2200634 Valve Seat Reconditioning Kit 3 PU-45257 Valve Spring Compressor 3 PA-46075 Flywheel Puller 3 PA-46087 Crankcase Separator 3 2870390 Piston Support Block 3 2872105 Water Pump Mechanical Seal Puller 3 PA-45958 Cam Chain Tensioner Assembly Tool 3 PA-46076 MAG End Crankshaft Nut Remover/Installer 3 PA-46077 MAG End Crankshaft Installer 3 2871283 Crankshaft/Water Pump Seal Install Kit 3 5131135 Water Pump Install Kit 3 PA-46502 Valve Spring Compressor 3 2870975 Mity Vac™ Pressure Test Tool 3,4 2872314 Carburetor Float Adjustment Tool 4 PS-45259 Gas Fill Tool 5 PS-45261 IFP Positioning / Extraction Tool 5 PA-48282 Rear Hub Tool 5 PV-43568 Fluke™ 77 Digital Multimeter 7 2870630 Timing Light 7 *Special Tools can be ordered through a Polaris Dealer or SPX Corporation (1-800-328-6657). 1.6 RepairPro Service Manual GENERAL INFORMATION Special Tool Listing Standard Tools and Engine Tools 1 Special Tools may be required while servicing your machine. Some of the tools listed are mandatory and other tools may be substituted with a similar tool, if available. Tools shown may not apply to a particular vehicle. Polaris recommends the use of Polaris special tools when servicing any Polaris product. Standard Tools and Engine Tools 2870569 - Crankshaft True Kit PU-45432 - Caliper or A Basic Caliper 2870386 - Piston Pin Puller Basic Micrometer PA-46502 - Valve Spring Compressor PA-46076 Mag End Crank Nut Remover/Install PA-46077 - Mag End Crankshaft Installer PV-43527 Oil Filter Wrench PA-46087 - Crankcase Separator PA-46075 - Flywheel Puller 5131135 - Water Pump Install Tool 2870390 - Piston Support Block PA-45958 - Cam Chain Tensioner Tool 1.7 GENERAL INFORMATION Standard Tools and Engine Tools 2870303 - Hone Kit 2871283 - Crank/Water Pump Seal Install Kit Suspension Tools 2870305 - Stone Replacement Kit PS-45261 - Shock IFP Positioning / Extraction Tool 2870588 - Hone Oil (12 OZ.) PS-45259 - Gas Fill Tool 2200634 - Valve Seat Reconditioning Kit Final Drive 2870459 - Dial Indicator PV-35667-A - Cylinder Leak down Tester PA-48282 Rear Hub Tool 2872105 - Water Pump Seal Puller 1.8 RepairPro Service Manual GENERAL INFORMATION Fuel & Brake Systems Electrical Tools 1 2870630 - Timing Light 2870975 - Mity Vac™ Electrical Tools 2871745 - Static Timing Light Harness PV-43568 - Fluke™ 77 Multimeter 2460761 - Hall Sensor Probe Harness PV-39617 - Current Clamp PV-39991 - Peak Reading Adapter 2870836 - Battery Hydrometer 8712500 Tachometer PV-39951-A Tachometer PV-37453 - Christie™ Se-Sulfating Multi-Battery Charger PV-63070 - Christie™ Multi-Battery Charger 1.9 GENERAL INFORMATION MISC. NUMBERS / CHARTS Decimal Equivalents 1/64 SAE Tap / Drill Sizes 3/64 Thread Size/ Drill Size #0-80 3/64 #1-64 53 #1-72 53 #2-56 51 #2-64 50 #3-48 5/64 #3-56 45 #4-40 43 #4-48 42 #5-40 38 #5-44 37 #6-32 36 #6-40 33 #8-32 29 #8-36 29 #10-24 24 #10-32 21 #12-24 17 #12-28 4.6mm 1/4-20 7 1/4-28 3 5/16-18 F 5/16-24 I 3/8-16 O 3/8-24 Q 7/16-14 U 7/16-20 25/64 Thread Size / Drill Size 1/2-13 27/64 1/2-20 29/64 9/16-12 31/64 9/16-18 33/64 5/8-11 17/32 5/8-18 37/64 3/4-10 21/32 3/4-16 11/16 7/8-9 49/64 7/8-14 13/16 1-8 7/8 1-12 59/64 1 1/8-7 63/64 1 1/8-12 1 3/64 1 1/4-7 1 7/64 1 1/4-12 1 11/64 1 1/2-6 1 11/32 1 1/2-12 1 27/64 1 3/4-5 1 9/16 1 3/4-12 1 43/64 2-4 1/2 1 25/32 2-12 1 59/64 2 1/4-4 1/2 2 1/32 2 1/2-4 2 1/4 2 3/4-4 2 1/2 3-4 2 3/4 5/64 7/64 9/64 11/64 13/64 15/64 17/64 19/64 21/64 23/64 25/64 13/32 27/64 29/64 31/64 33/64 35/64 37/64 39/64 Metric Tap / Drill Sizes Tap Size Drill Size 3x.50 3x.60 4x.70 4x.75 5x.80 5x.90 6x1.00 7x1.00 8x1.00 8x1.25 9x1.00 9x1.25 10x1.25 10x1.50 11 x 1.50 12x1.50 12x1.75 #39 3/32 #30 1/8 #19 #20 #9 16/64 J 17/64 5/16 5/16 11/32 R 3/8 13/32 13/32 1.10 41/64 Decimal Equivalent 0.0995 0.0937 0.1285 0.125 0.166 0.161 0.196 0.234 0.277 0.265 0.3125 0.3125 0.3437 0.339 0.375 0.406 0.406 Nearest Fraction 3/32 3/32 1/8 1/8 11/64 5/32 13/64 15/64 9/32 17/64 5/16 5/16 11/32 11/32 3/8 13/32 13/32 43/64 45/64 47/64 49/64 51/64 53/64 55/64 57/64 59/64 61/64 63/64 ................. 1/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 1/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 3/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 1/8 . . . . . . . .1250 ................. 5/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 3/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 7/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 1/4 . . . . . . . .25 ................. 9/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 5/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 11/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 3/8 . . . . . . . .375 ................. ................. ................. 7/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 15/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 1/2 . . . . . . . .5 ..... ................. 17/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 9/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 19/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 5/8 . . . . . . . .625 ... ................. 21/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 11/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 23/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 3/4 . . . . . . . .75 ................. 25/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 13/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 27/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 7/8 . . . . . . . .875 ................. 29/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 15/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. 31/32 . . . . . . . . . . . . ................. .0156 .0312. . . 1 mm= .0394" .0469 .0625 .0781. . . 2 mm = .0787" .0938 .1094. . . 3 mm =.1181" .1406 .1563. . . 4 mm = .1575" .1719 .1875. . . 5mm= .1969" .2031 .2188 .2344. . . 6 mm = .2362" .2656. . . 7 mm = .2756" .2813 .2969 .3125. . . 8mm= .3150" .3281 .3438. . . 9 mm = .3543" .3594 .3906. . . 10 mm = .3937" .4063 .4219. . . 11 mm =.4331" .4375 .4531 .4688. . . 12 mm = .4724" .4844 . . . . . . . 13mm = .5118" .5156 .5313 .5469. . . 14 mm = .5512" .5625 .5781. . . 15 mm = .5906" .5938 .6094 . . . . . . . 16mm=. 6299" .6406 .6563. . . 17 mm =.6693" .6719 .6875 .7031. . . 18 mm = .7087" .7188 .7344. . . 19 mm = .7480" .7656 .7813. . . 20 mm = .7874" .7969 .8125. . . 21 mm =.8268" .8281 .8438 .8594. . . 22 mm = .8661" .8906. . . 23 mm = .9055" .9063 .9219 .9375. . . 24 mm = .9449" .9531 .9688. . . 25 mm = .9843" .9844 1 . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 RepairPro Service Manual GENERAL INFORMATION Coversion Table Unit of Measure Multiplied by ft. lbs. x 12 = in. lbs. in. lbs. x .0833 = ft. lbs. ft. lbs. x 1.356 = Nm in. lbs. x.0115 = kg-m Nm x .7376 = ft. lbs. kg-m x 7.233 = ft. lbs. kg-m x 86.796 = in. lbs. kg-m x 9.807 = Nm in. x 25.4 =mm mm x .03937 = in. in. x 2.54 = cm mile (mi.) x 1.6 = km km x .6214 = mile (mi.) Ounces (oz.) x 28.35 = Grams (g) Fluid Ounces (fl. oz.) x 29.57 = Cubic Centimeters (cc) Cubic Centimeters (cc) x .03381 = Fluid Ounces (fl. oz.) Grams (g) x 0.035 = Ounces (oz.) lb. x .454 = kg kg x 2.2046 = lb. Cubic inches (cu. in) x 16.387 = Cubic centimeters (cc) Cubic centimeters (cc) x 0.061 = Cubic inches (cu. in) Imperial pints (Imp pt.) x 0.568 = Liters (l) Liters (l) x 1.76 = Imperial pints (Imp pt.) Imperial quarts (Imp qt.) x 1.137 = Liters (l) Liters (l) x 0.88 = Imperial quarts (Imp qt.) Imperial quarts (Imp qt.) x 1.201 = US quarts (US qt.) US quarts (US qt.) x 0.833 = Imperial quarts (Imp qt.) US quarts (US qt.) x 0.946 = Liters (l) Liters (l) x 1.057 = US quarts (US qt.) US gallons (US gal) x 3.785 =Liters (l) Liters (l) x 0.264 = US gallons (US gal) Pounds - force per square inch (psi) x 6.895 = Kilo pascals (kPa) Kilo pascals (kPa) x 0.145 = Pounds - force per square inch (psi) Kilo pascals (kPa) x 0.01 = Kilograms - force per square cm Kilograms - force per square cm x 98.1 = Kilo pascals (kPa) ð(3.14)xR2xH (height) 1 Converts to = Cylinder Volume °C to °F: 9 (°C + 40)+ 5 - 40 = °F °F to °C: 5 (°F + 40) + 9 - 40 = °C 1.11 GENERAL INFORMATION Glossary of Terms ABDC: After bottom dead center. ACV: Alternating current voltage. Alternator: Electrical generator producing voltage alternating current. ATDC: After top dead center. BBDC: Before bottom dead center. BDC: Bottom dead center. BTDC: Before top dead center. CC: Cubic centimeters. Center Distance: Distance between center of crankshaft and center of driven clutch shaft. Chain Pitch: Distance between chain link pins (No. 35 = 3/8" or 1 cm). Polaris measures chain length in number of pitches. CI: Cubic inches. Clutch Buttons: Plastic bushings which aid rotation of the movable sheave in the drive and driven clutch. Clutch Offset: Drive and driven clutches are offset so that drive belt will stay nearly straight as it moves along the clutch face. Clutch Weights: Three levers in the drive clutch which relative to their weight, profile and engine RPM cause the drive clutch to close and grip the drive belt. Crankshaft Run-Out: Run-out or "bend" of crankshaft measured with a dial indicator while crankshaft is supported between centers on V blocks or resting in crankcase. Measure at various points especially at PTO. DCV: Direct current voltage. Dial Bore Gauge: A cylinder measuring instrument which uses a dial indicator. Good for showing taper and out-of-round in the cylinder bore. Electrical Open: Open circuit. An electrical circuit which isn't complete. Electrical Short: Short circuit. An electrical circuit which is completed before the current reaches the intended load. (i.e. a bare wire touching the chassis). End Seals: Rubber seals at each end of the crankshaft. Engagement RPM: Engine RPM at which the drive clutch engages to make contact with the drive belt. ft.: Foot/feet. Foot Pound: Ft. lb. A force of one pound at the end of a lever one foot in length, applied in a rotational direction. g: Gram. Unit of weight in the metric system. gal.: Gallon. ID: Inside diameter. in.: Inch/inches. Inch Pound: In. lb. 12 in. lbs. = 1 ft. lb. kg/cm2: Kilograms per square centimeter. kg-m: Kilogram meters. Kilogram/meter: A force of one kilogram at the end of a lever one meter in length, applied in a rotational direction. l or ltr: Liter. lbs/in2: Pounds per square inch. Left or Right Side: Always referred to based on normal operating position of the driver. m: Meter/meters. Mag: Magneto. Magnetic Induction: As a conductor (coil) is moved through a magnetic field, a voltage will be generated in the windings. Mechanical energy is converted to electrical energy in the stator. mi.: Mile/miles. mm: Millimeter. Unit of length in the metric system. 1 mm = approximately .040". Nm: Newton meters. OD: Outside diameter. Ohm: The unit of electrical resistance opposing current flow. oz.: Ounce/ounces. Piston Clearance: Total distance between piston and cylinder wall. psi.: Pounds per square inch. PTO: Power take off. PVT: Polaris Variable Transmission (Drive Clutch System) qt.: Quart/quarts. Regulator: Voltage regulator. Regulates battery charging system output at approx. 14.5 DCV as engine RPM increases. Reservoir Tank: The fill tank in the liquid cooling system. Resistance: In the mechanical sense, friction or load. In the electrical sense, ohms, resulting in energy conversion to heat. RPM: Revolutions per minute. Seized Piston: Galling of the sides of a piston. Usually there is a transfer of aluminum from the piston onto the cylinder wall. Possible causes: 1) improper lubrication; 2) excessive temperatures; 3) insufficient piston clearance; 4) stuck piston rings. Stator Plate: The plate mounted under the flywheel supporting the battery charging coils. TDC: Top dead center. Piston's most outward travel from crankshaft. Volt: The unit of measure for electrical pressure of electromotive force. Measured by a voltmeter in parallel with the circuit. Watt: Unit of electrical power. Watts = amperes x volts. WOT: Wide open throttle. 1.12 RepairPro Service Manual MAINTENANCE CHAPTER 2 MAINTENANCE PERIODIC MAINTENANCE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 MAINTENANCE CHART KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 PRE-RIDE MAINTENANCE INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 RECOMMENDED PRE-RIDE FLUID LEVEL CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 0 - 50 HOUR MAINTENANCE INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 50 - 100 HOUR MAINTENANCE INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 100 - 300 HOUR MAINTENANCE INTERVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 MAINTENANCE REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 2 LUBRICANTS AND SERVICE PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 POLARIS LUBRICANTS, MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 GENERAL VEHICLE INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10 PRE-RIDE / DAILY INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10 FRAME, NUTS, BOLTS, AND FASTENERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10 FUEL SYSTEM AND AIR INTAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10 FUEL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10 FUEL LINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10 VENT LINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11 FUEL VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11 CARBURETOR DRAINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11 CARBURETOR PILOT SCREW ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12 IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12 THROTTLE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12 THROTTLE CABLE / ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) ADJUSTMENT . . 2.13 CHOKE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13 AIR FILTER AND PRE-FILTER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13 AIR BOX DRAIN TUBE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14 CRANKCASE BREATHER FILTER INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14 ENGINE AND TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14 ENGINE OIL LEVEL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14 ENGINE OIL AND FILTER SERVICE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15 OIL PUMP PRIMING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16 COMPRESSION TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16 EXHAUST PIPE / SPARK ARRESTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16 ENGINE MOUNT LOCATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17 LIQUID COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17 COOLING SYSTEM OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17 COOLANT STRENGTH / TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18 COOLING SYSTEM HOSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18 RADIATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18 RECOVERY BOTTLE COOLANT LEVEL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18 COOLING SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19 RADIATOR SCREEN REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19 FINAL DRIVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19 CLUTCH ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19 REVERSE LOCK-OUT LEVER INSPECTION AND CABLE ADJUSTMENT. . . . . . . . . 2.19 SPROCKET INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19 DRIVE CHAIN INSPECTION / REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20 DRIVE CHAIN TENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20 DRIVE CHAIN ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21 REAR DRIVESHAFT BOOT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21 REAR DRIVESHAFT BOOT “PRESSURE EQUALIZING” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22 2.1 MAINTENANCE ELECTRICAL AND IGNITION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22 BATTERY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22 BATTERY INSPECTION / REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23 BATTERY TERMINALS / BOLTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23 OFF SEASON STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23 ENGINE- TO- FRAME GROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23 CHARGING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23 SPARK PLUG INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24 IGNITION TIMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24 STEERING AND SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24 STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24 CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25 WHEEL ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.25 STEERING INSPECTION / TIE ROD ENDS AND HUBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26 TOE ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27 CAMBER AND CASTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27 SUSPENSION SPRING PRELOAD ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.27 REAR SHOCK COMPRESSION ADJUSTMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29 BRAKE SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29 BRAKE SYSTEM INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29 HOSE / FITTING INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30 BRAKE PAD INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30 BRAKE TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30 WHEELS AND TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30 WHEELS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30 WHEEL, HUB, AND SPINDLE TORQUE TABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30 WHEEL REMOVAL: FRONT OR REAR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30 TIRE PRESSURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.31 TIRE INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.31 2.2 RepairPro Service Manual MAINTENANCE PERIODIC MAINTENANCE CHART Periodic Maintenance Overview Careful periodic maintenance will help keep your vehicle in the safest, most reliable condition. Inspection, adjustment and lubrication of important components are explained in the periodic maintenance chart. Inspect, clean, lubricate, adjust and replace parts as necessary. When inspection reveals the need for replacement parts, use genuine Polaris parts available from your Polaris dealer. NOTE: Service and adjustments are critical. If you’re not familiar with safe service and adjustment procedures, have a qualified dealer perform these operations. Maintenance intervals in the following chart are based upon average riding conditions and an average vehicle speed of approximately 10 miles per hour. Vehicles subjected to severe use must be inspected and serviced more frequently. Severe Use Definition • Frequent immersion in mud, water or sand • Racing or race-style high RPM use • Prolonged low speed, heavy load operation • Extended idle • Short trip cold weather operation Pay special attention to the oil level. A rise in oil level during cold weather can indicate contaminants collecting in the oil sump or crankcase. Change oil immediately if the oil level begins to rise. Monitor the oil level, and if it continues to rise, discontinue use and determine the cause or see your dealer. Maintenance Chart Key The following symbols denote potential items to be aware of during maintenance: = CAUTION: Due to the nature of these adjustments, it is recommended this service be performed by an authorized Polaris dealer. = SEVERE USE ITEM --If vehicle is subjected to severe use, decrease interval by 50% (Severe Use is defined as frequent vehicle immersion in mud, water or sand, racing or race-style high rpm use, prolonged low speed - heavy load operation or extended idle. More preventative maintenance is required under these conditions. Fluid changes, cable, chain and chassis lubrication are required more frequently. For engine oil, short trip cold weather riding also constitutes severe use. Pay special attention to oil level. A rising oil level in cold weather can indicate contaminants collecting in the oil sump or crankcase. Change oil immediately and monitor level. If oil level begins to rise, discontinue use and determine cause.) E= Emission Control System Service (California). NOTE: Inspection may reveal the need for replacement parts. Always use genuine Polaris parts. WARNING Improperly performing the procedures marked could result in component failure and lead to serious injury or death. Have an authorized Polaris dealer perform these services. 2.3 2 MAINTENANCE Pre-Ride Maintenance Interval Periodic Maintenance Chart Maintenance Interval (whichever comes first) Item - Pre-Ride - Pre-Ride - Tires - Pre-Ride - Brake Fluid Level - Pre-Ride - Brake Lever Travel - Pre-Ride - Brake Systems Wheels / Fasteners Frame Fasteners - Pre-Ride Pre-Ride Pre-Ride - - Pre-Ride - Drive Chain Throttle - Pre-Ride Pre-Ride - Check operation Clutch - Pre-Ride - Check operation and adjustment Engine Stop Switch - Pre-Ride - Check operation Air Filter / Pre-Filter - Pre-Ride - Inspect; clean often - Pre-Ride - Drain deposits when visible Coolant - Pre-Ride - Head Lamp / Tail Lamp - Pre-Ride - A-arm Ball Joint - Pre-Ride Rear Shaft Assembly - Pre-Ride Post-Ride Hours Steering Front / Rear Suspension Engine / Trans Oil Level E E Air Box Sediment Tube E Remarks Miles (KM) - Calendar - Make adjustments as needed. Check level daily, change coolant every 2 years Check operation; apply dielectric grease if replacing Check freeplay daily; have dealer replace if wheel moves excessively Check pre-ride for tears, punctures, leaking. Check post-ride for bulging / ballooning. Replace if damaged. Burp if bulging. Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use. E Emission Control System Service ( California) Have an authorized Polaris dealer perform these services. Recommended Pre-Ride Fluid Level Checks ITEM Engine / Trans Oil Coolant / Level Brake Fluid TYPE NOTES SEE PAGES Polaris PS-4 Synthetic Engine Oil Add to proper level on dipstick Polaris Premium 60/40 Pre–mixed Allow engine and cooling system to cool completely Antifreeze/Coolant or a 50/50 and check level in radiator. Fill to top of filler neck. If mixture high quality antifreeze/ reservoir was empty or extremely low, fill radiator coolant and distilled water before filling reservoir tank to full line Fill to indicated level inside reservoir. Polaris DOT 3 or DOT 4 Brake Fluid Use the sight glass to ensure the proper fluid level. 2.14 2.18 2.29 NOTE: Quick Reference Lubricants and maintenance product part numbers are listed on page 2.9 2.4 RepairPro Service Manual MAINTENANCE 0 - 50 Hour Maintenance Interval Periodic Maintenance Chart Item Hours E E E E E Air Filter, Main Element Maintenance Interval (whichever comes first) Miles Calendar (KM) Remarks 2 - Weekly - Inspect; replace as needed 1H - - Perform a break-in oil change at 1 hour or 1 tank of gas 10 H - 100 (160) Check pre-ride level Oil Filter Change 10 H - 100 (160) Replace with oil change Brake Pad Wear 10 H Monthly 100 (160) Inspect periodically Battery Engine Breather Filter (in air box) 20 H Monthly 200 (320) Check terminals; clean; test 20 H Monthly 200 (320) Inspect; replace if necessary Engine / Trans Oil Change (Break-In) Engine / Trans Oil Change Valve Lash 50 H - - General Lubrication 50 H 3M 500 (800) Drive Chain 50 H 6M 500 (800) 50 H 6M 500 (800) 50 H 6M 500 (800) 50 H 6M 500 (800) Choke Cable 50 H 6M 500 (800) Clutch cable Carburetor Air Intake / Flange 50 H 6M 500 (800) Check clearance. Re-shim only if out of specification. Lubricate all grease fittings, pivots, cables, etc. Inspect daily; adjust and lubricate as needed Inspect; tighten fasteners; grease (especially after washing or driving in high water levels) See page 2.6 Drain bowl periodically and prior to storage Inspect; adjust; lubricate; replace if necessary Inspect; adjust; lubricate; replace if necessary Inspect, lubricate, adjust 50 H 6M 500 (800) Inspect ducts for proper sealing / air leaks Cooling System 50 H 6M 500 (800) Steering 50 H 6M 500 (800) Front / Rear Suspension Carburetor Float Bowl Throttle Cable / ETC E Switch E E Inspect coolant strength seasonally; pressure test system yearly Lubricate Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use. E Emission Control System Service (California) Have an authorized Polaris dealer perform these services. 2.5 MAINTENANCE 50 - 100 Hour Maintenance Interval Periodic Maintenance Chart Item E E Maintenance Interval (whichever comes first) Miles Hours Calendar (Km) Remarks Inspect; tighten fasteners; grease after washing ATV or driving in water Inspect; tighten fasteners; grease (also after washing ATV or driving in water) Inspect; tighten fasteners; grease (also after washing ATV or driving in water) Upper Steering Post (A) 50 H 3M 500 (800) Front A-arms (B) 50 H 3M 500 (800) Rear Control Arm Bushings (C) 50 H 3M 500 (800) Stabilizer Bar (D) 50 H 6M 500 (800) Grease Rear Control Arm Needle Bearings (E) 100 H 12 M 1000 (1600) Disassemble, clean, inspect bearings and seals, grease, reassemble Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use. E Emission Control System Service (California) Have an authorized Polaris dealer perform these services. C D B A E E E C B 2.6 RepairPro Service Manual MAINTENANCE 100 - 300 Hour Maintenance Interval Periodic Maintenance Chart Item Maintenance Interval (whichever comes first) Miles Hours Calendar (Km) Remarks 2 Oil Tank Vent Hose 100 H 12M 1000 (1600) Inspect routing, condition E Fuel System 100 H 12M 1000 (1600) Check for leaks at tank cap, lines, fuel valve, filter, pump, carburetor. Replace lines every two years E Fuel filter 100 H 12 M 1000 (1600) Replace yearly Coolant System Pressure Test 100 H 12 M 1000 (1600) Pressure test system annually Radiator 100 H 12M 1000 (1600) Cooling Hoses 100 H 12M 1000 (1600) Inspect; clean external surfaces; change coolant every 2 years Inspect for leaks Engine Mounts Exhaust Pipe 100 H 100 H 12M 12M 1000 (1600) 1000 (1600) Inspect Inspect Spark Plug 100 H 12M 1000 (1600) Inspect; replace as needed Ignition Timing - 12M - Inspect Wiring 100 H 12M 100 H 200 H 300 H 300 H E Clutch Plates Brake Fluid Front Wheel Bearings Spark Arrestor Idle Speed 12M 24M 36M 36M - Toe Adjustment - Headlight Aim - E E E Inspect for wear, routing, security; apply 1000 (1600) dielectric grease to connectors subjected to water, mud, etc. 1000 (1600) Inspect; replace worn parts 2000 (3200) Change every two years 3000 (4800) Inspect; replace as needed 3000 (4800) Clean out as required Adjust as needed Inspect periodically; adjust when parts are replaced Adjust as needed Perform these procedures more often for vehicles subjected to severe use. E Emission Control System Service (California) Have an authorized Polaris dealer perform these services. 2.7 MAINTENANCE Maintenance References 2. Brake Fluid (Right hand and Foot Brake Master Cylinder) 1. Engine Oil and Filter 3. Rear Drive Chain Sight Glass Fill to Indicated Level Oil Filter Location III. # Item Lube Rec. Method Frequency* 1. Engine Oil / Transmission Polaris PS-4 Synthetic Check dipstick and add to proper level. Perform break–in oil / filter change at one hour; change oil every 10hrs / 100mi. ** 2. Brake Fluid Polaris DOT 3 or DOT 4 Brake Fluid 3. Drive Chain Polaris Chain Lube Fill master cylinder reservoirs As required. Change fluid every to indicated level inside 2 years or 200 hours. *** reservoir. Apply to chain link plates and rollers. As required * * More often under severe use, such as operation in mud, water, sand or under severe loads. ** Every 10 hours of operation (refer to Maintenance Schedule for additional information). Change more often in extremely dirty conditions such as continuous operation in water, mud or sand, continuous hot, cold, or short trip cold weather operation. NOTE: Excessive clutch plate residue will accelerate oil change intervals. *** Every 24 months or 200 hours of operation (refer to Maintenance Schedule for additional information). More often under severe conditions such as continuous operation in water, mud or sand. 2.8 RepairPro Service Manual MAINTENANCE LUBRICANTS AND SERVICE PRODUCTS Polaris Lubricants, Maintenance and Service Products PART NO. DESCRIPTION 2 ENGINE LUBRICANT 2874414 Engine Oil (Quart) PS 4 Synthetic (4-Cycle) 2874415 Engine Oil (Gallon) PS 4 Synthetic (4-Cycle) GREASE / SPECIALIZED LUBRICANTS 2871322 Premium All Season Grease (3 oz. cartridge) 2871423 Premium All Season Grease (14 oz. cartridge) 2876006 Rear Shaft Grease 2871460 Starter Drive Grease 2871312 Grease Gun Kit 2871329 Dielectric Grease 2872073 Chain Lube (Aerosol) 2871323 60/40 Coolant (Gallon) 2871534 60/40 Coolant (Quart) COOLANT ADDITIVES / SEALANTS / THREAD LOCKING AGENTS / MISC. 2870791 Fogging Oil (12 oz. Aerosol) 2871326 Premium Carbon Clean (12 oz.) 2870652 Fuel Stabilizer (16 oz.) 2870585 Loctite™ Primer N, Aerosol, 25 g 2870990 DOT 3 Brake Fluid 2872189 DOT 4 Brake Fluid 2871956 Loctite™ Thread Sealant 565 (50 ml.) 2871949 Loctite™ Threadlock 242 (50 ml.) 2871950 Loctite™ Threadlock 242 (6 ml.) 2871951 Loctite™ Threadlock 262 (50 ml.) 2871952 Loctite™ Threadlock 262 (6 ml.) 2871953 Loctite™ Threadlock 271 (6 ml.) 2871954 Loctite™ Threadlock 271 (36 ml.) 2870584 Loctite™ RC 680–Retaining Compound (10 ml.) 2870587 Loctite™ 518 Gasket Eliminator / Flange Sealant (50 ml.) 2871957 Black RTV Silicone Sealer (3 oz. tube) 2871958 Black RTV Silicone Sealer (11 oz. cartridge) 8560054 Silicone Sealer (14 oz. cartridge) 2871557 Crankcase Sealant, 3–Bond 1215 2872893 Engine Degreaser 2.9 MAINTENANCE GENERAL VEHICLE INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE FUEL SYSTEM AND AIR INTAKE Fuel System Pre-Ride / Daily Inspection WARNING Perform the following pre-ride inspection daily, and when servicing the vehicle at each scheduled maintenance. Gasoline is extremely flammable and explosive under certain conditions. • Tires – check condition and pressures • Chain - Check tension, lubricate, adjust as needed • Always stop the engine and refuel outdoors or in a well ventilated area. • Fuel and oil tanks – fill both tanks to their proper level; Do not overfill oil tank • Do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks in or near the area where refueling is performed or where gasoline is stored. • All brakes – check operation and adjustment (includes auxiliary brake • Do not overfill the tank. Do not fill the tank neck. • Throttle – check for free operation • If you get gasoline in your eyes or if you swallow gasoline, seek medical attention immediately. • Headlight/Taillight/Brakelight – check operation of all indicator lights and switches • If you spill gasoline on your skin or clothing, immediately wash it off with soap and water and change clothing. • Engine stop switch – check for proper function • Wheels – check for loose wheel nuts and axle nuts; check to be sure axle nuts are secured by cotter pins • Never start the engine or let it run in an enclosed area. Engine exhaust fumes are poisonous and can result in loss of consciousness or death in a short period of time. • Air cleaner element – check for dirt or water; clean or replace • Never drain the float bowl when the engine is hot. Severe burns may result. • Steering – check for free operation, noting any unusual looseness in any area • Loose parts – visually inspect vehicle for any damaged or loose nuts, bolts or fasteners Fuel Lines Fuel Pump • Engine coolant – check for proper level at the recovery bottle Fuel Inlet Frame, Nuts, Bolts, and Fasteners Periodically inspect the torque of all fasteners in accordance with the maintenance schedule. Check that all cotter pins are in place. Refer to specific fastener torques listed in each chapter. Fuel Outlet Pulse Line 1. 2. Check fuel lines for signs of wear, deterioration, damage, or leakage. Replace if necessary. Be sure fuel lines are routed properly and secured with cable ties. CAUTION Make sure lines are not kinked or pinched. 2.10 RepairPro Service Manual MAINTENANCE 3. Replace all fuel lines every two years. 6. Turn valve on, start engine and inspect for leaks. Vent Lines Carburetor Draining Check engine, fuel tank, oil tank, and carburetor vent lines for signs of wear, deterioration, damage, or leakage. Replace every two years. The carburetor float bowl should be drained periodically, or before extended periods of storage, to remove moisture or sediment from the bowl. Be sure vent lines are routed properly and secured with cable ties. NOTE: The bowl drain screw is located on the bottom left side of the float bowl. CAUTION Make sure lines are not kinked or pinched Fuel Valve 1. 2. Turn fuel valve to the “Off” position. Place a clean container beneath the bowl drain spigot or bowl drain hose. 3. Turn drain screw out two turns and allow fuel in the float bowl and fuel line to drain completely. 4. Inspect the drained fuel for water or sediment. 5. Tighten drain screw. 6. Turn fuel valve to “On”. 7. Start machine and check for leaks. NOTE: All tubes attached to the carburetor must be checked for pinching or blockage, as this will effect engine performance. Fuel Valve Drain Screw The fuel system strains the fuel through screens located in the fuel valve. There is no fuel filter to service. To service the fuel valve: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Shut off fuel supply at fuel valve. Remove line clamps and fuel lines from the tank. Remove the tank and drain remainder of fuel into a appropriate container. Remove fuel valve by loosening the screws holding the valve to the tank. Inspect the valve for damage or debris. Replace the valve if problems are found. Reverse the procedures to install the fuel valve. 2.11 2 MAINTENANCE Carburetor Pilot Screw Adjustment NOTE: The pilot screw is covered by a brass welsh plug per EPA requirements. Removal will be required to perform these procedures. 6. Slowly turn mixture screw counterclockwise until idle speed increases to maximum RPM. Continue turning counterclockwise until idle RPM begins to drop. 7. Center the pilot screw between the points in Step 5 and 6. 8. Readjust idle speed to specification. NOTE: Always check throttle cable freeplay after adjusting idle speed and adjust if necessary. Idle Speed Adjustment FRONT (Engine Side) NOTE: Adjusting the idle speed effects throttle cable freeplay and electronic throttle control (ETC) adjustment. Always check throttle cable freeplay after adjusting idle speed and adjust if necessary. BSR Carburetor Pilot Screw Location 1. 2. Start the engine and warm it up to operating temperature (about 10 minutes). With engine off, turn pilot screw in (clockwise) until lightly seated. Turn screw out the specified number of turns. Pilot Screw Initial Setting: Outlaw 500 - 2.5 Turns Out NOTE: Do not tighten the pilot screw forcefully against the seat or the screw and/or seat will be permanently damaged. Idle Screw 1. 2. Idle Speed 1600 ± 100 RPM CAUTION The pilot screw is calibrated at the factory to meet EPA / CARB regulations for air quality standards and is sealed with a brass plug to prevent tampering. Removal of the tamper proof plug is not permitted. For service purposes, cleaning of the pilot circuit can be done only by a certified repair shop to ensure air quality standards are not exceeded. 3. 4. 5. Connect an accurate tachometer that will read in increments of + or - 50 RPM such as the PET 2100DX (PN 8712100DX) or the PET 2500 (PN 8712500). Start engine. Set idle speed to 1600 RPM. Slowly turn mixture screw clockwise using the pilot screw or an appropriate sized screwdriver until engine begins to miss. 2.12 Start engine and warm it up thoroughly. Adjust idle speed by turning the idle adjustment screw in (clockwise) to increase or out (counterclockwise) to decrease RPM. Throttle Inspection Check for smooth throttle opening and closing in all handlebar positions. Throttle lever operation should be smooth and lever must return freely without binding. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Place the gear selector in neutral. Set parking brake. Start the engine and let it idle. Turn handlebars from full right to full left. If idle speed increases at any point in the turning range, inspect throttle cable routing and condition. Adjust cable tension as needed until lock-to-lock turning can be accomplished with no rise in engine rpm. Replace the throttle cable if worn, kinked, or damaged. Inspect ETC cover seal and switch cavity by removing the cover. Verify that no dirt, water or mud is present. RepairPro Service Manual MAINTENANCE 5. To remove the ETC cover: 1. 2. 3. Use a medium flat blade screwdriver and insert blade into the pocket of the cover starting on the #1 position Twist screwdriver slightly while lifting on the cover to release snap. Repeat procedure at the other five locations as shown. Turn adjuster until 1/16” to 1/8” (1-2mm) freeplay is achieved at thumb lever. After making adjustments, quickly actuate the thumb lever several times and reverify freeplay. 2 2 3 1 6 5 Direction of Travel 4 Freeplay 1/16”-1/8” (1-2mm) 6. 7. NOTE: Do not attempt to remove cover until all latch points are released. Tighten lock nut securely and slide boot completely in place to ensure a water–tight seal. Turn handlebars from left to right through the entire turning range. If idle speed increases, check for proper cable routing. If cable is routed properly and in good condition, repeat adjustment procedure. Throttle Cable / Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Adjustment Choke Adjustment 1. Slide boot off throttle cable adjuster and jam nut. 2. Place shift selector in neutral and set parking brake. 3. Start engine and set idle to 1600 RPM. NOTE: Be sure the engine is at operating temperature. See Idle Speed Adjustment. If the choke knob does not stay out when pulled, adjust the choke tension by tightening (clockwise) the jam nut under the rubber boot between the choke knob and nut. Firmly grasp the rubber boot and tighten until the choke slides freely but stays out when pulled. 4. Verify free play of 1/16-3/16” (1.6-4.76 mm) and smooth operation of choke cable. Loosen lock nut on in–line cable adjuster. Lock Nut Boot Adjuster Sleeve Boot If smooth choke operation is not obtainable, inspect choke cable for kinks or sharp bends in routing. Choke Air Filter and Pre-filter Service It is recommended that the air filter and pre-filter be inspected frequently. When riding in extremely dusty conditions, replacement is required more often. 2.13 MAINTENANCE The pre filter should be cleaned before each ride using the following procedure: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Unlatch and remove the seat. Release the two air box cover clips (A) and rotate the cover rearward to remove it. Remove the air filter retaining screw (B). Loosen the filter clamp (C). Remove the main air filter (D). Remove the pre-filter (E) from the main filter element. Remove the breather filter (F). Air Box Drain Tube Periodically check the air box drain tube located on the bottom side of the air box. Be sure the drain tube is not obstructed by mud or sand. Whenever deposits are visible, clean out the tube. E D F Drain Tube B NOTE: The drain tube will require more frequent inspection if the vehicle is operated in severe conditions. Crankcase Breather Filter Inspection C A Cleaning: 8. 9. Wash the pre-filter (E) and breather filter (F) in soapy water, then rinse and let dry. Wash the main filter element (D) without removing it from the internal filter cage. Rinse and let dry. When dry, apply a commercially available foam filter oil thoroughly on the element. Installation: 10. Check the hoses for cracks, deterioration, abrasion, or leaks. Replace as needed. 11. Reinstall crankcase breather filter, pre-filter and air filter into air box. Install the air filter retaining screw. 12. Reinstall the air box cover and secure the cover with the two clips. 2.14 Outlaw ATV engines are equipped with a crankcase breather filter in the air box. The filter is similar in appearance to a small foam block, and is visible on the left side (See Illustration to the left, Reference F). The air breather filter should be inspected or replaced whenever the air filter is inspected. ENGINE AND TRANSMISSION Engine Oil Level Check Check the oil level before each use of the vehicle. The dipstick is located on the left side of the ATV. Dipstick Location Oil Level Marks RepairPro Service Manual MAINTENANCE 1. 2. 3. Position the ATV on a level surface. Start the engine and let it idle for one minute. Stop the engine and remove the dipstick. Wipe it dry with a clean cloth. 4. Reinstall the dipstick completely. NOTE: The dipstick must be screwed completely in to keep the angle and depth of the stick consistent. 5. 6. 8. 9. Allow the oil to drain completely. Replace the sealing washer and reinstall the plug. Torque to 14 ft. lbs. (19 Nm). 10. Place shop towels beneath the oil filter cover. 11. Remove the three cover bolts and remove the cover. 2 Remove the dipstick and check the oil level. Maintain the oil level in the safe range, between the full and add marks. Do not overfill. Reinstall the dipstick. Engine Oil and Filter Service IMPORTANT: Polaris PS-4 Engine Oil is recommended for use in the Predator. PS-4 was specifically designed for the Predator’s engine and clutching system. Other oils do not contain the needed additives to prolong engine life and provide proper lubrication to the Predator clutch and transmission components. 1. 2. Place the vehicle on a level surface. Clean the area around the oil tank and crankcase drain plugs with clean shop towels. 72–78 in. lbs. (8–9 Nm) NOTE: A spring located behind the filter may pop out as the filter is removed. The spring must be reinstalled with the new filter. 12. Pull out the oil filter. WARNING Hot oil can cause serious burns to the skin. Do not allow hot oil to contact skin. 3. 4. Run the engine for two to three minutes until warm, then stop the engine. Place a drain pan beneath the oil tank and remove the drain plug (1). 2 Oil Filter 14 ft. lbs. (19 Nm) 1 5. 6. Allow the oil to drain completely. Replace the sealing washer and reinstall the plug. Torque to 14 ft. lbs. (19 Nm). NOTE: The sealing surfaces on drain plugs, oil tank and crankcase should be clean and free of burrs, nicks or scratches. 7. Spring 13. Using a clean dry cloth, clean the filter sealing surfaces. Place a drain pan beneath the crankcase and remove the drain plug (2). 2.15 MAINTENANCE 14. Replace the gasket in the cover. 3. Gasket Shut off engine. Remove the vent line clamp. The oil pump should now be properly primed and ready for field operation. NOTE: If the system is primed properly you should hear some air release. If you do not, the system has not primed. Repeat the process if necessary. Compression Test 15. Lubricate the gasket on the new filter with a film of fresh engine oil. 16. Reinstall the spring and install the new filter with the open end facing outward. 17. Install the cover and torque the bolts to 72–78 in. lbs. (8– 9 Nm). NOTE: The long bolt must be placed in the forward hole. 18. Remove the dipstick and fill the oil tank with 2.25 quarts (1.9 l) of Polaris PS-4 Engine Oil (PN 2874414). 19. Place gear selector in neutral and set parking brake. 20. Start the engine and let it idle for one to two minutes. Stop the engine and inspect for leaks. 21. Re–check the oil level on the dipstick and add oil as necessary to bring the level to the upper mark on the dipstick. 22. Dispose of used filter and oil properly. Oil Pump Priming Procedure NOTE: The oil pump priming procedure should be performed as a safeguard against loss of pump prime when repairing oil tank, lines or engine. 1. Clamp or pinch off vent line approximately 2″ from oil tank (P), between the end of oil tank vent fitting and the vent line. P NOTE: This engine has built-in decompression components. Compression readings will vary in proportion to cranking speed during the test. Average compression (measured) is about 85-90 psi @ 400 RPM during a compression test. A cylinder leakdown test is the best indication of engine condition. Follow manufacturer’s instructions to perform a cylinder leakage test. (Never use high pressure leakage testers, as crankshaft seals may dislodge and leak). Cylinder Compression w / decompression Standard: 85-90 PSI @ 400 RPM Cylinder Leakdown Service Limit: 10% (Inspect for cause if leakage exceeds 10%) Exhaust Pipe / Spark Arrestor WARNING • Do not perform clean out immediately after the engine has been run, as the exhaust system becomes very hot. Serious burns could result from contact with exhaust components. • To reduce fire hazard, make sure that there are no combustible materials in the area when purging the spark arrestor. • Wear eye protection. • Do not stand behind or in front of the vehicle while purging the carbon from the spark arrestor. • Never run the engine in an enclosed area. Exhaust contains poisonous carbon monoxide gas. • Do not go under the machine while it is inclined. Set the hand brake and block the wheels to prevent roll back. 2. Run engine for 5-10 seconds at IDLE. 2.16 Failure to follow these warnings could result in serious personal injury or death. RepairPro Service Manual MAINTENANCE arrestor is damage is found. Periodically clean the spark arrestor to remove accumulated carbon. Verify which type of spark arrestor your ATV is equipped with and follow the appropriate cleaning procedure below: (A) or (B) Inspect the screen 2 Procedure A - End Cap Spark Arrestor 1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the three screws (1) and remove the arrestor (2) from the end of the muffler. Use a non-synthetic brush to clean the arrestor screen (3). A synthetic brush may melt if components are warm. If necessary, blow debris from screen with compressed air. Inspect the screen for wear and damage. Replace the arrestor is damage is found. Remove and inspect the gasket (4). Replace if worn or damaged. 3 2 4. Reinstall the arrestor and torque the bolt to 7 ft. lbs. (9.5 Nm) Engine Mount Locations Inspect engine mounts and frame for cracks or damage. 1 Check engine fasteners and ensure they are tight. Engine Mounting Locations 4 5. 6. Reinstall the gasket and arrestor. Torque screws to 50 in. lbs. (5.6 Nm). Procedure B - Set Screw Type Spark Arrestor 1. Remove the bolt and remove the arrestor from the end of the muffler. LIQUID COOLING SYSTEM Bolt Cooling System Overview The engine coolant level is maintained by the recovery system.The recovery system components are the recovery bottle, radiator filler neck, radiator pressure cap and connecting hose. Spark Arrestor 2. 3. Use a non-synthetic brush to clean the arrestor screen. A synthetic brush may melt if components are warm. If necessary, blow debris from screen with compressed air. Inspect the screen for wear and damage. Replace the As coolant operating temperature increases, the expanding (heated) excess coolant is forced out of the radiator past the pressure cap and into the recovery bottle. As engine coolant temperature decreases the contracting (cooled) coolant is drawn back up from the tank past the pressure cap and into the radiator. • Some coolant level drop on new machines is normal as the system is purging itself of trapped air. Observe coolant levels often during the break–in period. 2.17 MAINTENANCE • Overheating of engine could occur if air is not fully purged from system. • Polaris Premium 60/40 anti-freeze is premixed and ready to use. Do not dilute with water. 2. Do not over–tighten hose clamps at radiator or radiator fitting may distort, causing a restriction or leak. Radiator hose clamp torque is 36 in.lbs. (4 Nm). Radiator Coolant Strength / Type 1. Test the strength of the coolant using an antifreeze hydrometer. 2. 3. Check radiator external air flow passages for restrictions or damage. Carefully straighten any bent radiator fins. Remove any obstructions with compressed air or low pressure water. Recovery Bottle Coolant Level Inspection WARNING Antifreeze Hydrometer • A 50/50 or 60/40 mixture of antifreeze and distilled water will provide the optimum cooling, corrosion protection, and antifreeze protection. Never remove the radiator pressure cap when the engine is warm or hot. Escaping stream and fluid can cause severe burns. The engine must be allowed to cool before removing the pressure cap. • Do not use tap water. Tap water contains minerals and impurities which build up in the system. Do not add straight antifreeze or straight water to the system. Straight water or antifreeze may cause the system to freeze, corrode, or overheat. The recovery bottle, is located on the right side of the vehicle under the front fender. The fluid level must be maintained between the FULL (A) and ADD (B) marks on the side panel (when the fluid is cool). Recovery Bottle Polaris 60/40 Anti-Freeze / Coolant (PN 2871323) Cooling System Hoses Inspect all hoses for cracks, deterioration, abrasion or leaks. Replace if necessary. A B If coolant is not between the FULL and ADD marks, perform the following steps: 1. 1. Remove reservoir cap. Verify the breather foam is in place and the inner splash cap vent hole is clear and open. Check tightness of all hose clamps. 2.18 RepairPro Service Manual MAINTENANCE 2. Fill reservoir to upper mark with Polaris Premium 60/40 Anti Freeze / Coolant (PN 2871323) or a mixture of antifreeze and distilled water as required for freeze protection in your area. 3. Reinstall cap. NOTE: If overheating is evident, allow system to cool completely and check coolant level in the radiator. Inspect for signs of trapped air in system. Cooling System Pressure Test See Chapter 3 for testing procedures. 4. 5. Squeeze the lever fully and release. Slightly squeeze the lever again until a slight resistance is felt. Measure the freeplay again. If necessary, repeat the adjustment procedure until proper freeplay is attained. Replace the clutch perch pivot boot over the screw and lock ring. Reverse Lock-Out Lever Inspection and Cable Adjustment Check for smooth lever operation and ensure that the lever returns freely without binding (1). Radiator Screen Removal 1. Remove the 4 screws retaining the radiator screen for access to the radiator fins when cleaning. Adjust the reverse cable freeplay to .08”-.12” by adjusting the cable jam nuts (2). 2 Sprocket Inspection Inspect the sprocket for worn, broken or bent teeth. FINAL DRIVE Clutch Adjustment 1. Measure clutch lever freeplay between the perch and the lever (A). This distance should be 1/8” – 3/16” (3.1 mm – 4.7 mm) CLUTCH LEVER FREEPLAY C B 2. 3. A If adjustment is required, slide the clutch perch pivot boot down the clutch cable to access the clutch adjustment screw (B) and lock ring (C). Loosen the lock ring and turn the screw in (clockwise) to increase lever travel. Turn the screw out (counterclockwise) to decrease lever travel. Tighten the lock ring. To check for wear, pull upward on the chain at the area indicated (arrow). Replace sprocket if chain movement exceeds 1/4” (.6 cm). 2.19 2 MAINTENANCE Drive Chain Inspection / Replacement Inspect the drive chain for missing or damaged O–Rings, link plates, or rollers. Do not wash the chain with a high pressure washer, gasoline or solvents; do not use a wire brush to clean the chain as damage to the O–Rings may occur. Clean chain with hot soapy water and a soft bristled nylon brush. Polaris ATV drive chains are equipped with O–ring sealed permanently greased pins and rollers.The sprockets and outer rollers require periodic lubrication. Lubricate the chain with Polaris Chain Lubricant (PN 2872073). If a gap is noticed between the outside edge of the master link and plate, back the plate out and close the gap. Master Link Do not press plate in too far Never allow battery acid to contact the drive chain. The chain must be replaced when it reaches 3% elongation. 1. 2. Stretch the chain tightly in a straight line. Measure the length of 21 pitches (pins) from pin center to pin center, and compare to the specification. Replace the chain if the length exceeds the wear limit. Drive Chain Wear Limit, 21 Pitch Length: Std: 12.5″(32 cm) Wear Limit: 12.875” (32.7 cm) 3. When replacing or reinstalling drive chain, install the closed end of the splice link clip as shown, with the closed end leading in forward operation. There should be a .003.005″ (.076-.127 mm) gap between the side plate of the chain and the splice link clip. See illustrations below. Proper Spacelink Clip Opening Position .003 - .005″ (.076- .127 mm) Gap after installation Drive Chain Tension CAUTION Never adjust or operate the vehicle with the rear drive chain too loose or too tight. Severe damage to the transmission and drive components can result. BREAK-IN: It is extremely important to maintain proper chain tension to ensure the best possible chain life. There is a chain break–in period of approximately 100 miles or two (2) tanks of fuel. During this time chain tension should be watched very closely and loads to the chain should be kept light. CHECKING CHAIN TENSION: Check the amount of chain slack by moving the vehicle slightly forward to remove slack at the top side of the chain. At the center point of the top side of the chain there should be 1/4” - 3/ 8” (6-9 mm) deflection. NOTE: The chain has a press-on master link. A chain tool must be used if it’s necessary to remove the chain for service. 2.20 RepairPro Service Manual MAINTENANCE Drive Chain Adjustment Rear Driveshaft Boot Inspection 1. Before Operating Loosen the upper and lower pivot mounting bolts (1). Inspect the boots before operating the vehicle. If a boot is torn, punctured or leaking fluid, replacement is required. 2 OK 1 2. Thread the chain adjusting bolt (2) inward or outward to adjust chain slack to the proper dimension. After Operating Inspect the boots after operating the vehicle. If a boot is bulging or ballooned, perform the boot “burping” procedure. 2 1 3. 4. Torque the pivot mounting bolts to 30 ft. lbs. (41 Nm). Torque the chain adjusting bolt to 20 ft. lbs. (27 Nm). 2.21 MAINTENANCE Rear Driveshaft Boot “Pressure Equalizing” ELECTRICAL AND IGNITION SYSTEM 1. Battery Maintenance Using a needle nose pliers or boot clamp removal tool, remove the small boot clamp (1) from the inboard boot. NOTE: Do not use any tools that may damage the boot. WARNING Battery electrolyte is poisonous. It contains sulfuric acid. Serious burns can result from contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Antidote: External: Flush with water. Internal: Drink large quantities of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten egg, or vegetable oil. Call physician immediately. Eyes: Flush with water for 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. 2. Slide the free end of the boot two inches toward the center of the vehicle and lift the boot away from the shaft to allow excess air to escape. Batteries produce explosive gases. Keep sparks, flame, cigarettes, etc. away. Ventilate when charging or using in an enclosed space. Always shield eyes when working near batteries. KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN. The battery is located under the front cab at the front of the ATV. NOTE: The Outlaw battery is a Low Maintenance design and construction. Before placing the battery into service, check the battery condition and charge accordingly. Use of Conventional Lead-Acid batteries is not recommended. 3. 4. Wipe excess grease from the shaft before returning the boot to the boot groove. Use caution not to allow excess air back into the system when reinstalling the boot. Reinstall the boot clamp. New Batteries: Batteries must be fully charged before use or battery life will be reduced by 10–30% of full potential. Charge battery for 3-5 hours at a current equivalent of 1/10 of the battery’s rated amp/hour capacity (i.e. 9 amp hr x.10 =.9 amp charging). Do not use the alternator to charge a new battery. Maintenance-Free batteries are sealed at the factory. The use of lead-calcium instead of lead-antimony allows the battery acid to be fully absorbed by the plates. Therefore, a Maintenance-Free battery case is opaque and the sealing caps are not removable, since there is no need to check electrolyte level. IMPORTANT: Never attempt to add electrolyte or water to a Maintenance-Free battery. Doing so will damage the case and shorten the life of the battery. 2.22 RepairPro Service Manual MAINTENANCE Battery Inspection / Removal Off Season Storage The battery is located under the front cab at the front of the ATV. Removal of the front cab assembly is required to access the battery. Refer to “Chapter 5” for front cab removal. To prevent battery damage during extended periods of non–use, the following basic battery maintenance items must be performed: • Remove the battery from the machine and wash the case and battery tray with a mild solution of baking soda and water. Rinse with fresh water after cleaning. NOTE: Do not get any of the baking soda into the battery or the acid will be neutralized. • Using a wire brush or knife, remove any corrosion from the cables and terminals. Battery Location • Never add water to a sealed maintenance free battery. • Charge at a rate no greater than 1/10 of the battery’s amp/hr capacity until the open circuit voltage is 12.9V or greater. To remove the battery: 1. 2. 3. Remove the front cab. Disconnect holder strap. Disconnect battery negative (–) (black) cable first, followed by the positive (+) (red) cables. CAUTION To reduce the chance of sparks: Whenever removing the battery, disconnect the negative (black) cable first. When reinstalling the battery, install the negative cable last. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the battery. Clean battery cables and terminals with a stiff wire brush. Corrosion can be removed using a solution of one cup water and one tablespoon baking soda. Rinse well with clean water and dry thoroughly. Test battery for condition and charge accordingly. If required, charge battery at 1/10 of its amp/hour rating. Example: 1/10 of 14 amp battery = 1.4 amp Reinstall battery, attaching positive (+) (red) cable first and then the negative (–) (black) cable. Coat terminals and bolt threads with Dielectric Grease (PN 2871329). Reinstall battery cover, holder strap and front cab. • Store the battery either in the machine with the cables disconnected, or store in a cool place. Engine- To- Frame Ground Inspect engine–to–frame ground cable connection. Be sure it is clean and tight. Charging Procedure NOTE: Remote charging terminals have been provided to allow for battery charging without removal of the front cab. 1. Attach the Positive battery charging cable to the Red Charge Terminal (A); which is directly connected to the positive battery terminal. It is located just above the front right shock mount. 2. Attach the Negative battery charging cable to the free end of the Black Cable (B) under the right front cab (which is directly connected to the negative battery terminal). Battery Terminals / Bolts Ensure battery terminals are clean of corrosion. Use Polaris corrosion resistant Dielectric Grease (PN 2871329) on battery bolts. 2.23 2 MAINTENANCE 3. Charge with a charging output no larger than 1/10 of the battery's amp/hr rating. Charge as needed to raise the open circuit voltage to 12.9 V or greater. A 8. Remove spark plug. and inspect electrodes for wear and carbon buildup. The insulator tip should be a light tan color, indicating good combustion. Look for a sharp outer electrode edge with no rounding or erosion. 9. If needed, clean spark plug with electrical contact cleaner or a glass bead spark plug cleaner only. NOTE: Wire brushes or coated abrasives should not be used. 10. Measure gap with a wire gauge. Refer to specifications for proper spark plug type and gap. Adjust gap if necessary by bending the side electrode carefully. 11. If necessary, replace spark plug with proper type. B CAUTION Severe engine damage may occur if the incorrect spark plug is used. WARNING To avoid the possibility of explosion or sparks, connect positive (red) cable first and negative (black) cable last. 12. Apply a small amount of anti–seize compound to the spark plug threads. 13. Install spark plug and torque to specification. Reverse steps as needed for reassembly. Recommended Spark Plug: Spark Plug Inspection NGK DCPR8E Spark Plug Removal and Replacement 1. 2. 3. Turn the fuel valve to OFF. Remove the side panels and front cab. Move the fuel valve hose clamp forward and gently remove the hose (1) from the fuel valve fitting on the gas tank. Spark Plug Torque: 14 Ft. Lbs. (19 Nm) Spark Plug Gap 2 3 1 .035″ (0.9mm) 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the vent hose (2) from the instrument panel, taking note of the hose routing for reinstallation. Remove the tank mounting bolt (3) at the rear of the gas tank. Move the tank rearward and upward over the engine. Slowly remove the tank, being careful not to catch any hoses, wires or other components. Place the tank on a stable surface or work bench to protect the valve from contamination or damage. Remove spark plug high tension lead. Clean plug area so no dirt and debris can fall into engine when plug is removed. 2.24 Ignition Timing Timing is non-adjustable. Refer to Chapter 7 for ignition timing inspection. STEERING AND SUSPENSION Steering The steering components should be checked periodically for loose fasteners, worn tie rod ends, ball joints, and damage. Also check to make sure all cotter pins are in place. If cotter pins are removed, they must not be re–used. Always use new cotter pins. RepairPro Service Manual MAINTENANCE Replace any worn or damaged steering components. Steering should move freely through entire range of travel without binding. Check routing of all cables, hoses, and wiring to be sure the steering mechanism is not restricted or limited. NOTE: Whenever steering components are replaced, check front end alignment. Use only genuine Polaris parts. Wheel Alignment One of two methods can be used to measure toe alignment. The string method and the chalk method. If adjustment is required, refer to following for procedure. METHOD 1: USING A STRAIGHTEDGE OR STRING WARNING WARNING Due to the critical nature of the procedures outlined in this chapter, Polaris recommends steering component repair and adjustment be performed by an authorized Polaris MSD certified technician when replacing worn or damaged steering parts. Use only genuine Polaris replacement parts. Severe injury or death can result from improper toe alignment and adjustment. 1. Position the vehicle on a level surface. NOTE: Always measure toe alignment on a flat ground surface. 2. Controls Check controls for proper operation, positioning and adjustment. 3. Handlebars Place the handlebars in a straight-ahead position. Use tie straps to secure the handlebars to the rear grab bar so they can’t move. Place stands (1) in front of the vehicle, perpendicular to the rear tires. See illustration below. 2 If desired, the handlebars can be adjusted for rider preference. WARNING Improper adjustment of the handlebars or incorrect torquing of the adjuster lock bolts can cause limited steering of the handle bars, which could result in loss of control and serious injury or death. 1. Loosen the four bolts and adjust the handlebar to the desired height. Be sure the handlebars do not contact the gas tank or any other part of the machine when turned fully to the left or right. 3 1 11 ft. lbs. (15 Nm) 1 4. 2. Torque the rear two bolts to 11 ft. lbs. (15 Nm), then torque the front two bolts. A gap of up to 1/8” will remain at the rear bolts. Tie an elastic string (2) around the stands, making sure the string just touches the side surface of the rear tires on each side of the vehicle and goes around the stands in front of the vehicle. 2.25 2 MAINTENANCE 5. 6. Measure the distance between the string in front of the rear tires (A) and in front of the front tires (B). If the two measurements are not equal, adjust the string position until the measurements are equal. Measure the distance from the string to the rim at the front and rear of the front rim (3). The difference between these two measurements should be between 0” and 1/16” toe out. • Repeat inspection for inner tie rod end on steering post. METHOD 2: USING A CHALK LINE 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Place machine on a smooth level surface. Set handlebars in a straight ahead position and secure handlebars in this position. NOTE: The steering post arm “frog” can be used as an indicator of whether the handlebars are straight. The frog should be centered with equal clearance between the steering stops. Place a chalk mark on the center line of the front tires as close to the hub/axle center line as possible, or measure to a specific distance from the floor. NOTE: It is important that the height of both marks be equally positioned in order to get an accurate measurement. Measure the distance between the marks and record the measurement. Call this measurement “A”. Rotate the tires 180o by moving vehicle forward or backward. Position chalk marks even with the hub/axle centerline or the specified floor measurement. Again measure the distance between the marks and record. Call this measurement “B”. Subtract measurement “B” from measurement “A”. The difference between measurements “A” and “B” is the vehicle toe alignment. The recommended vehicle toe tolerance is 0 to 1/16” (0 to.0625 cm) toe out. This means the measurement at the front of the tire (A) is 0 to 1/16” (0 to.0625 cm) wider than the measurement at the rear (B). • Elevate front end of machine so front wheels are off the ground. Check for any looseness in front hub / wheel assembly by grasping the tire firmly at top and bottom first, and then at front and rear. Try to move the wheel and hub by pushing inward and pulling outward. • If abnormal movement is detected, inspect the hub and wheel assembly to determine the cause (possible loose wheel nuts or loose front hub components). Check for Loose Wheel or Hub • Refer to the Body/Suspension Chapter 5 or Final Drive Chapter for service procedures. Chalk Line Measurement ‘B’ Chalk Line Measurement ‘A’ Steering Inspection / Tie Rod Ends and Hubs • To check for play in the tie rod end, grasp the steering tie rod, pull in all directions feeling for movement. 2.26 RepairPro Service Manual MAINTENANCE Toe Alignment Adjustment Suspension Spring Preload Adjustment If toe alignment is incorrect, measure the distance between vehicle center and each wheel. This will tell you which tie rod needs adjusting. The front suspension preload may be adjusted to suit different conditions and operator weight. WARNING NOTE: Be sure handlebars are straight ahead before determining which tie rod(s) need adjustment. Uneven adjustment may cause poor handling of the ATV, which could result in an accident and serious injury or death. Always adjust both the left and right spring preloads equally or have your Polaris dealer perform the adjustments. CAUTION During tie rod adjustment, it is very important that the following precautions be taken when tightening tie rod end jam nuts. If the rod end is positioned incorrectly it will not pivot, and may break. To adjust toe alignment: • Hold tie rod end to keep it from rotating. 2 Front Suspension Set-Up 1. 2. 3. Position the vehicle on a level surface. Stop the engine. Elevate the front of the vehicle by placing a suitable stand under the frame. NOTE: The tires should be barely touching the ground and the suspension should be at full rebound. • Loosen jam nuts at both ends of the tie rod. 4. Measure the distance from the ground to the bottom of the lower front bumper bolt. Note this measurement for later use. 5. Remove the support stand and have a rider sit comfortably on the seat with hands on the handlebars. Place the transmission in neutral and slowly roll the machine forward and backward at least ten feet (3 m) without lifting or pushing down on the suspension. Turn the handlebars fully to the left and right. With the rider still on the vehicle, repeat the measurement performed in step 4. • Shorten or lengthen the tie rod until alignment is as required to achieve the proper toe setting as specified in Method 1 or Method 2. • IMPORTANT: When tightening the tie rod end jam nuts, the rod ends must be held parallel to prevent rod end damage and premature wear. Damage may not be immediately apparent if done incorrectly. • After alignment is complete, torque jam nuts to specification. Hold Rod End Level While Nut Is Tightened 12–14 ft. lbs. (16–19 Nm) Correct Tie Rod End Incorrect Tie Rod End Camber and Caster The camber and caster are non–adjustable. 6. 7. 8. 2.27 MAINTENANCE 9. Subtract the step 8 measurement from the step 4 measurement. The difference should be between 3.75 and 4 inches (9.5 - 10.2 cm). 10. If the number is less than 3.75 inches (9.5 cm), decrease the front spring preload and repeat all steps (See “Front Spring Preload Adjustment”). If the number is higher than 4 inches (10.2 cm), increase spring preload and repeat all steps. Rear Suspension Set-Up Front Spring Preload Adjustment Position the vehicle on a level surface. Stop the engine. Elevate the rear of the vehicle by placing a suitable stand under the frame. NOTE: The tires should be barely touching the ground and the suspension should be at full rebound. 1. 4. Raise and safely support the front of the ATV off the ground to allow the suspension to fully extend. 1. 2. 3. Measure the distance from the ground to the bottom of the rear lower control arm pivot bolt. Note this measurement for later use. Preload adjustment tool is included in tool kit Figure 2-27 2. Turn the adjusting ring (1) clockwise to increase preload or counter-clockwise to decrease preload. 5. 1 Decrease Preload Spring Spacer Increase Preload Ride-In Spring Remove the support stand and have a rider sit comfortably on the seat with hands on the handlebars. 6. Place the transmission in neutral and slowly roll the machine forward and backward at least ten feet (3 m) without lifting or pushing down on the suspension. 7. Turn the handlebars fully to the left and right. 8. With the rider still on the vehicle, repeat the measurement performed in step 4. 9. Subtract the step 8 measurement from the step 4 measurement. The difference should be between 4 and 4.25 inches (10.2 - 10.8 cm). 10. If the number is less than 4 inches (10.2 cm), decrease the rear spring preload on both shocks and repeat all steps. (See “Rear Spring Preload adjustment”) If the number is higher than 4.25 inches (10.8 cm), increase spring preload and repeat all steps. Rear Spring Preload Adjustment • The rear suspension spring preload and shock compression damping may be adjusted to suit different riding conditions and operator weight. 1. 2.28 Raise and safety support the rear of the ATV off the ground to allow the suspension to fully extend. RepairPro Service Manual MAINTENANCE 2. Turn the adjusting ring (1) clockwise to increase preload or counter-clockwise to decrease preload. See Figure 2-27 on previous page. Rear Compression Adjustments Setting 1 Decrease Preload Increase Preload Compression Damping Softest Position #1 - Full Counter-Clockwise Factory Position #4 - 3 Clicks from #1 Firmest Position #7 - 6 Clicks from #1 2 BRAKE SYSTEM Brake System Inspection Spring Spacer Ride-In Spring The following checks are recommended to keep the brake system in good operating condition. Service life of brake system components depends on operating conditions. Inspect brakes in accordance with the maintenance schedule and before each ride. • Keep fluid level in the master cylinder reservoir to the indicated level inside reservoir. • Use Polaris DOT 3 or DOT 4 Brake Fluid Rear Shock Compression Adjustment The compression damping adjustment is located on the bottom of each rear shock. Parking Brake Lock Use a flat blade screwdriver to make adjustments. There are 7 positions of compression adjustment. The softest adjustment is position #1. To obtain position #1, turn the adjuster counter-clockwise until it stops. The firmest adjustment is position #7. To obtain position #7, start from position #1 and turn the adjuster clockwise 6 clicks. Sight Glass Front Master Cylinder The factory setting is position #4 or 3 clicks clockwise from position #1. Softest - 1 Factory - 4 Firmest - 7 7 Positions Position 1 - Full Counter-Clockwise. Position 7 - 6 Clicks Clockwise from Position 1. Use a screwdriver to adjust Rear Master Cylinder Compression Adjustment Location • Check brake system for fluid leaks. • Check brake for excessive travel or spongy feel. • Check friction pads for wear, damage or looseness. 2.29 MAINTENANCE • Check surface condition of the disc. Free Play: • Inspect thickness of brake pad friction material. Free play of the brake pedal should be 1/8″ – 1/4″ (3.2 – 6.35 mm). Hose / Fitting Inspection Check brake system hoses and fittings for cracks, deterioration, abrasion, and leaks.Tighten any loose fittings and replace any worn or damaged parts. Brake Pad Inspection Pads should be changed when the friction material is worn to 3/64” (.1 cm), or about the thickness of a U.S. dime. If free play is excessive, inspect pedal (1), linkage, and master cylinder (2) for wear or damage and replace any parts as needed. Bleeding: If free play is correct and brake pedal travel is still excessive, air may be trapped somewhere in the system. Bleed the hydraulic auxiliary brake system in a conventional manner, following the procedure outlined in the Brake Chapter. WHEELS AND TIRES Wheels Inspect all wheels for runout or damage. Check wheel nuts and ensure they are tight. Do not over tighten the wheel nuts. Wheel, Hub, and Spindle Torque Table 3/64” (.1cm) Minimum Thickness Brake Testing The foot brake should be checked for proper function. Item Specification Front Wheel Nuts 30-35 Ft. Lbs. (41-47 Nm) Rear Wheel Nuts 30-35 Ft. Lbs. (41-47 Nm) Front Spindle Nut 40 Ft. Lbs. (55 Nm) Rear Hub Retaining Nut 90 Ft. Lbs. (108 Nm) Wheel Removal: Front or Rear Wheel Removal 1. 2. 3. 4. 1 2 Wheel Installation 1. When applied, the brake power should be sufficient enough to stop the wheels under most conditions. If brake operation is poor, two things must be examined: 2.30 Stop the engine, place the transmission in gear and lock the parking brake. Loosen the wheel nuts slightly. Elevate the side of the vehicle by placing a suitable stand under the footrest frame. Remove the wheel nuts and remove the wheel. 2. 3. With the transmission in gear and the parking brake locked, place the wheel in the correct position on the wheel hub. Be sure the valve stem is toward the outside and rotation arrows on the tire point toward forward rotation. Attach the wheel nuts and finger tighten them. Lower the vehicle to the ground. RepairPro Service Manual MAINTENANCE 4. Securely tighten the wheel nuts to the proper torque listed in the table. CAUTION Tire Tread Depth Always replace tires when tread depth is worn to 1/8″ (3 mm) or less. WARNING Improperly installed wheels could affect vehicle handling and tire wear. On vehicles with flange wheel nuts, make sure flat of nut goes onto wheel. 2 Operating your ATV with worn tires, improperly inflated tires, non - standard tires or improperly installed tires will affect vehicle handling and could cause an accident resulting in serious injury or death. Maintain proper tire pressure as described on the ATV decal and in the owner’s manual. Always use original equipment size and type when replacing tires. Make sure the wheels are installed properly. 1/8″ (.3 cm) Flat side against wheel Tire Pressure CAUTION Maintain proper tire pressure. Refer to the warning tire pressure decal applied to the vehicle. Tire Pressure (PSI - Cold) Front 5 Rear 5 Tire Inspection • Improper tire maneuverability. inflation may affect ATV • When replacing a tire always use original equipment size and type. • The use of non–standard size or type tires may affect ATV handling. 2.31 MAINTENANCE NOTES 2.32 RepairPro Service Manual ENGINE CHAPTER 3 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 ES50PL ENGINE SERVICE DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 ES50PL ENGINE SERVICE DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 ENGINE FASTENER TORQUE PATTERNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 GENERAL ENGINE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 PISTON IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 COMPRESSION TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR (THERMISTOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 RADIATOR CAP / SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 COOLING SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 ACCESSIBLE COMPONENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8 ENGINE REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8 ENGINE INSTALLATION NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9 CRANKSHAFT STRAIGHTENING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 ES50PL ENGINE LUBRICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 OIL PRESSURE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 OIL PUMP PRIMING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11 OIL FLOW - ES50PL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11 ES50PL OIL FLOW CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 ES50PL ENGINE EXPLODED VIEWS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13 3 UPPER ENGINE DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14 DISASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14 CAM CHAIN TENSIONER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14 CAM CHAIN TENSIONER INSPECTION AND REASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14 CAMSHAFT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15 AUTOMATIC COMPRESSION RELEASE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15 CAMSHAFT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16 CYLINDER HEAD REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16 CYLINDER AND PISTON REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17 PISTON REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17 PISTON AND ROD INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18 LOWER ENGINE DISASSEMBLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19 CRANKCASE DISASSEMBLY AND INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19 STARTER DRIVE GEARS REMOVAL AND INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19 FLYWHEEL / ONE-WAY STARTER CLUTCH REMOVAL AND INSPECTION. . . . . . . 3.19 CRANKSHAFT NUT REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20 CLUTCH COVER / CLUTCH REMOVAL AND INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20 SHIFTER COMPONENT REMOVAL AND INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22 OIL PUMP REMOVAL AND INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23 CRANKSHAFT DRIVE AND CAM GEAR REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23 CAM CHAIN / TENSIONER BLADE REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24 CRANKCASE SEPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24 CRANKCASE INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25 CRANKCASE BEARING INSPECTION / REMOVAL / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25 TRANSMISSION AND CRANKSHAFT SERVICE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26 TRANSMISSION REMOVAL AND INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26 TRANSMISSION MAIN SHAFT DISASSEMBLY / ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26 TRANSMISSION REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27 CRANKSHAFT REMOVAL / INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29 CRANKSHAFT INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29 3.1 ENGINE ENGINE REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.30 CRANKCASE REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.30 PISTON INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.31 PISTON RING INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.31 CYLINDER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32 CAM CHAIN INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32 CAMSHAFT TIMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32 PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.33 OUTLAW CAM TIMING EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34 CYLINDER HEAD SERVICE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35 CYLINDER HEAD INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35 CYLINDER HEAD WARP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35 CYLINDER HEAD DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35 CYLINDER HEAD VALVE GUIDE / VALVE SEAT INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36 VALVE GUIDE REMOVAL / INSTALLATION / REAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36 VALVE SEAT RECONDITIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37 VALVE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39 ES50PL ADJUSTING PAD SELECTION MATRIX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.40 CYLINDER HEAD ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.41 CYLINDER HEAD INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42 CYLINDER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42 CYLINDER INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42 PISTON–TO–CYLINDER CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43 CYLINDER HONE SELECTION AND HONING PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43 HONING TO DEGLAZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43 PISTON RING INSTALLED GAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.44 WATER PUMP SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.44 OIL SEAL / MECHANICAL SEAL REMOVAL (ENGINE DISASSEMBLED) . . . . . . . . . 3.44 WATER PUMP MECHANICAL SEAL INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.44 MECHANICAL SEAL REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (ENGINE ASSEMBLED) . . . . 3.45 TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.46 ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.46 SPARK PLUG FOULING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.48 COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.48 3.2 RepairPro Service Manual ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS Torque Specifications ES50PL Fastener Blind Plug (Crankcase) Blind Plug (Oil Filter Cover) Bearing Stop Plates Camshaft Chain Tensioner Blade Bolt Camshaft Chain Tensioner Camshaft Chain Tensioner Cap Camshaft Support Carburetor Adaptor Crankcase Cover Crankshaft Nut (Primary Drive Sprocket) Crankshaft Nut (Ball Bearing at Crankshaft) Cylinder Base / Head Bolts Clutch Basket Nut Clutch Cover Drive Sprocket and Sprocket Cover Flywheel (Apply engine oil to threads) Neutral Indicator Switch Oil Delivery Pipe Oil Drain Bolt (Crankcase) Oil Filter Cover Housing and Oil Pump Case Oil Hose Fittings One Way Valve Plug One Way Clutch Screws Pulser Coil (Apply PN2871557 to threads) Pressure Plate Screws Shift Cam Shift Lever Shift Detent Arm (Apply PN 2871557 to threads) Stator Housing Cover Stator Plate Starter Motor Spark Plug Timing Cover Plug (Center) Timing Cover Plug (Timing window) Thermo Cover Thermo Switch Valve Cover Water Pump Impeller Water Pump Housing Cover Radiator Thermistor Thread ES50PL: Ft. Lbs. (Nm) 1/8 PT 1/4 PT 6mm 8mm 6mm 6mm 8mm 8mm 8mm 18mm 32mm 11mm 6mm 18mm 6mm 6mm 14mm 5mm 12mm 14mm 6mm 8mm 11mm 6mm 5mm 6mm 6mm 6mm 6mm 6mm 5mm 6mm 12mm 32mm 14mm 6mm 3/8 NPT 6mm 6mm 6mm -- 6.6–11.1 (9–15 Nm) 12.5–17 (17–23 Nm) 8.1–9.6 (11–13 Nm) 10–12.2 (13.5–16.5 Nm) 6.6–8.1 (9–11 Nm) 6.6–8.1 (9–11 Nm) 6.6–7.5 (9–10 Nm) 11.8–14.8 (16–20 Nm) 6.6–8.1 (9–11 Nm) 81–96 (110–130 Nm) 66–81 (90–110 Nm) Refer to Page 3.42 6–8 (9–11 Nm) 66–81 (90–110 Nm) 6.6–8.1 (9–11 Nm) 6.6–8.1 (9–11 Nm) 111–125 (150–170 Nm) 2.2–3.7 (3–5 Nm) 11.1–15.5 (15–21 Nm) 14–17 (19–23 Nm) 6.6–8.1 (9–11 Nm) 8.1–10.3 (11-14 Nm) 11.1–15.5 (15-21 Nm) 9.6–11.1 (13–15 Nm) 1.8–2.6 (2.5–3.5 Nm) 6.6–8.1 (9–11 Nm) 5.9–7.4 (8–10 Nm) 6.6–8.1 (9–11 Nm) 6.6–8.1 (9–11 Nm) 6.6–8.1 (9–11 Nm) 4.1–5.8 (5.5–6.5 Nm) 6.6–8.1 (9–11 Nm) 11.1–14.8 (15–20 Nm) 7.4–8.8 (10–12 Nm) 2–4 (3–5 Nm) 5.2–6.6 (7–9 Nm) 23.6–28 (32–38 Nm) 6.6–8.1 (9–11 Nm) 6.6–8.1 (9–11 Nm) 6.6–8.1 (9–11 Nm) 8 ±12 in.lbs. (0.8 ± 1.36 Nm) 3.3 3 ENGINE ES50PL Engine Service Data Cylinder Head / Valve ES50PL In Cam lobe height Ex Camshaft Camshaft journal OD Camshaft journal bore ID Camshaft Oil clearance Cylinder Head Valve Seat Valve Guide Std 1.667–1.671” (42.35–42.45 mm) Limit 1.655” (42.05 mm) Std 1.667–1.671” (42.35–42.45 mm) Limit 1.655” (42.05 mm) Mag .9821–.9828” (24.946–24.963 mm) PTO .8652–.8655” (21.976–21.985 mm) Mag .9842–.9851” (25.000–25.021 mm) PTO .8657–.8661” (21.990–22.000 mm) Mag .0014–.0029” (.037–.075 mm) PTO .0001–.0009” (.005–.024 mm) Limit .004” (.10 mm) Surface warpage limit .0020” (.05 mm) Standard height 4.975” (126.4 mm) Contacting width **Measure valve stem height In Ex Std 1.5255” (38.75 mm) Limit 1.5425” (39.18 mm) Std 1.5255” (38.75 mm) Limit 1.5377” (39.06 mm) Inner diameter .2362- .2367” (6.0- 6.012 mm) Protrusion above head .535- .551” (13.6- 14.0 mm) In Margin thickness Ex Stem diameter Valve Stem oil clearance Std Std .039” (1.0 mm) Limit .031” (.8 mm) Std .039” (1.0 mm) Limit .031” (.8 mm) In .2343–.2348” (5.950–5.965 mm) Ex .2341–.2346” (5.945–5.960 mm) In .0014–.0024” (.035–.062 mm) Ex .0016–.0026” (.040–.067 mm) In 4.031” (102.4 mm) Ex 4.059” (103.1 mm) In .006” (.15 mm) +/- .0019” (.05 mm) Limit Overall length Valve Lash Valve Spring Overall length Limit = -.079” (-2.0 mm) Squareness 3.4 .0059” (.15 mm) Ex .010” (.27 mm) +/- .0019” (.05 mm) Inner 1.575” (40.0 mm) Outer 1.650” (41.9 mm) Inner .067-” (1.7 mm) Outer .071” (1.8 mm) RepairPro Service Manual ENGINE ES50PL Engine Service Data Cylinder / Piston / Connecting Rod / Crankshaft Cylinder ES50PL Surface warpage limit (mating with cylinder head) .002” (.05 mm) Cylinder bore 3.9055–3.9062” (99.20–99.22 mm) Std Taper limit .002” (.05 mm) Out of round limit .002” (.05 mm) Piston clearance Piston Outer diameter Std .0018- .0025” (.046- .065 mm) Limit .0039” (.10 mm) Std 3.9037- 3.904” (99.155- 99.170 mm) Piston Pin Bore Standard I.D. Outer diameter Piston Pin .9055- .9057” (23.001- 23.007 mm) Std .9053- .9055” (23.001 - 23.007 mm) Piston pin to pin bore clearance .0002- .0004” (.001- .0011 mm) Degree of fit Piston Pin must be a push (by hand) fit at 68o F(20o C) Top Ring Std .0012–.0028” (.030–.070 mm) Limit .0059” (.15 mm) Second Ring Std .0012–.0028” (.030–.070 mm) Limit .0059” (.15 mm) Top Ring Std .008–.012” (.20–.30 mm) Limit .027” (.7 mm) Second Ring Std .014–.019” (.35–.50 mm) Limit .031” (.8 mm) Std .004–.019” (.10–.50 mm) Limit .039” (1.0 mm) Piston Ring to ring groove clearance Piston Ring installed gap Oil Ring Connecting rod small end ID Connecting rod small end radial clearance Connecting Rod Connecting rod big end side clearance Connecting rod big end radial clearance Crankshaft 3 Crankshaft runout limit .9058- .9063” (23.007- 23.020 mm) Std .0003- .0009” (.007- .024 mm) Limit .0020” (.05 mm) Std .0035- .0196” (.09- .50 mm) Limit .0255” (.65 mm) Std .0004- .0015” (.011- .038 mm) Limit Same as standard .0024” (.06 mm) KEY – Std: Standard; OS: Oversize; ID: Inner Diameter; OD: Outer Diameter; Mag: Magneto Side; PTO: Power Take Off Side. 3.5 ENGINE GENERAL ENGINE SERVICE Special Tools PART NUMBER TOOL DESCRIPTION Water Pump Mechanical Seal Puller Valve Seat Reconditioning Kit 2872105 2200634 2870390 Piston Support Block PA-45958 Cam Chain Tensioner Assembly Tool PA-46075 Flywheel Puller PA- 46076 MAG End Crankshaft Nut Remover/Installer PA-46087 Crankcase Separator MAG End Crankshaft Installer Crankshaft/Water Pump Seal Install Kit PA-46077 2871283 5131135 Water Pump Install Kit PA-46502 Valve Spring Compressor Engine Fastener Torque Patterns Tighten cylinder head, cylinder base, and crankcase fasteners following the sequence outlined below. 2 5 1 4 6 The piston may or may not have an identification mark for piston placement. If the piston has an identification mark, follow the directions for piston placement below. If the piston does not have an identification mark, the direction for placement of the piston does not matter. NOTE: Note the directional and identification marks when viewing the pistons from the top. Identifying marks such as “F”, “J”, “X“or Q must always be positioned to the flywheel side of the engine. Other marks are used for identification as to diameter, length and design. Four stroke engine rings are a rectangular profile. See text for oil control ring rail installation. Use the information below to identify pistons and rings: Compression Test NOTE: This engine has built-in decompression components. Compression readings will vary in proportion to cranking speed during the test. Average compression (measured) is about 85-90 psi @ 400 RPM during a compression test. A cylinder leakdown test is the best indication of engine condition. Follow manufacturer’s instructions to perform a cylinder leakage test. Never use high pressure leakage testers, as crankshaft seals may dislodge and leak. Cylinder Head & Cylinder Base 3 Piston Identification 8 mm Cylinder Compression w / decompression Standard: 85-90 PSI @ 400 RPM 8 Cylinder Leakdown Service Limit: 10% (Inspect for cause if leakage exceeds 10%) 5 2 3 10 13 4 1 12 6 11 3.6 9 7 RepairPro Service Manual ENGINE Coolant Temperature Sensor (Thermistor) Radiator Cap Pressure Test 1. 2. 8-12 in. lbs. (.9-1.3 Nm) Remove radiator cap and test using a cap tester (commercially available). The radiator cap relief pressure is 13 psi. for all models. Replace if cap releases at less than 13 psi. Pressure test From Thermostat Sensor here with cap in place 3 To Water Pump Cooling System FLOW Radiator Coolant Flow Diagram Cooling System Specifications Thermostat Cylinder Head Water Pump Cylinder Description Temperature Fan Switch (Off) Fan Switch (On) 150o F (65o C) ± 8o 180o F (82o C) ± 7o 221o F (105o C) 2.25 Quarts (2.1 L) Hot Light On System Capacity Radiator Cap Relief Pressure 13 PSI Recommended Coolant Type WARNING Never remove radiator cap when engine is warm or hot. The cooling system is under pressure and serious burns may result. Allow the engine and cooling system to cool before servicing. Radiator Cap / System Pressure Test 1. 2. Use only high quality antifreeze/coolant mixed with distilled water in a 50/50 or 60/40 ratio, depending on freeze protection required in your area. IMPORTANT: Using tap water in the cooling system will lead to a buildup of deposits which may restrict coolant flow and reduce heat dissipation, resulting in possible engine damage. Polaris Premium 60/40 Antifreeze / Coolant (PN 2871323) is recommended for use in all cooling systems and comes pre–mixed, ready to use. Remove recovery bottle hose from coolant filler neck. Connect a Mity Vac™ (PN 2870975) to radiator and pressurize system to 10 PSI. The system must retain 10 lbs of pressure for five minutes or longer. If pressure loss is evident within five minutes, check radiator, all cooling system hoses and clamps, or water pump seal. 3.7 ENGINE Accessible Components Engine Removal The following components can be serviced or removed with the engine installed in the frame: 1. 2. 3. • Flywheel • Alternator/Stator • Starter Motor/Starter Drive 4. 5. Thoroughly clean the ATV engine and chassis. Clean work area. Support the ATV with jackstands under the footrests at a height sufficient to raise the rear wheels off the floor at least 5 inches (12.7 cm). Drain coolant and engine oil. Remove the following components: • Water Pump / Water Pump Mechanical Seal* • Seat *Mechanical Water Pump Seal Removal Tool (PN 2872105) is required to replace mechanical seal with engine in frame. • Side Panels • Front Cab (Refer to Chapter 5) The following components require engine removal for service: • Fuel Tank (Refer to Chapter 4) • Counterbalance Shaft or Bearing(s) • Connecting Rod • RH footwell (Refer to Chapter 5) 6. • Crankshaft • Crankshaft Main Bearings 7. 8. • Cylinder Head • Cylinder • Piston/RIngs • Camshaft • Cams 9. • Cam Chain and Sprockets • Transmission Gears and Bearings 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Disconnect battery cables, starting with the negative (–) cable first. Remove air intake duct. Remove carburetor. Caution: Fuel will leak if carb is turned upside down. In most instances, the carburetor will not have to be disconnected from the throttle cable, choke cable and fuel line for engine removal. Insert a shop towel into the carburetor flange to prevent dirt from entering the intake of the engine. Disconnect all electrical connections to the engine (coolant sensor, neutral switch, plug wire, starter cable, ground cable). Remove the magneto side cover, leaving the electrical components attached, and secure out of the way. Remove clutch and reverse cable linkage and secure out of the way. Remove fasteners from exhaust pipe and remove header pipe. Remove oil tank and hoses as an assembly. Disconnect vent line and secure out of the way. Loosen chain, disconnect and remove. An acceptable alternative is to remove the transmission drive sprocket and roll chain off. Remove all engine mount nuts and engine mount plates, starting at the rear with the combination engine / swing arm pivot mount first. Using a suitable tool, push the bolt out far enough to loosen the engine, but not drop the swing arm pivot. Use a jack under the bearing carrier to relieve tension from the pivot bolt for easier removal and installation. With an assistant helping you, remove the engine by tilting forward and turning to exit through left side of frame. To reinstall the engine, reverse the procedures. Refer to engine installation notes on Page 3.9. 3.8 RepairPro Service Manual ENGINE Engine Installation Notes Engine Break In Period After the engine is installed in the frame, review this checklist and perform all steps that apply: The break in period for a Polaris ATV engine is defined as the first ten hours of operation, or the time it takes to use two full tanks of gasoline. No single action on your part is as important as a proper break in period. Careful treatment of a new engine will result in more efficient performance and longer life for the engine. Perform the following procedures carefully. General Items • Torque Rear Engine Lower Mount to 90 ft. lbs. (122 Nm) • Torque Front Engine Lower Mount to 27 ft. lbs. (33 Nm) New and rebuilt engines require a break-in oil change at 1 hour of engine run time. • Install previously removed components using new Polaris PS-4 All Season synthetic oil is specially formulated for use with wet-clutch transmissions. Never substitute or mix oil brands. Serious engine damage and voiding of warranty can result. gaskets, seals, and fasteners where applicable. • Perform checks on fluid levels, controls, and all important areas on the vehicle as outlined in the daily pre–ride inspection checklist (refer to Chapter 2 or the Owner’s Manual). • Verify clutch and lever freeplay according to procedures in Chapter 2. • Adjust chain tension according to procedures in Chapter 2. 3 OIL RECOMMENDATION • Torque Top Engine Mount to 22 ft. lbs. (30 Nm) For new or rebuilt engines, do not operate at full throttle or high speeds for extended periods during the first three hours of use. Excessive heat can build up and cause damage to close fitted engine parts. 1. 2. Fill fuel tank with unleaded fuel which has a minimum pump octane number of 87= (R+ M)/2. Check oil reservoir level indicated on dipstick. Add oil if necessary. Exhaust • Replace exhaust gaskets. Seal connections with high temp silicone sealant if applicable. • Verify all fasteners are in good condition and torqued properly. SAFE 3. Bleed Cooling System 4. NOTE: Refer to Page 3.7 for hose routing. Bleeding generally is necessary after repairs to purge any air that may remain in the system during filling. 5. 1. Remove radiator cap and slowly add coolant to the bottom of filler neck. 2. Fill coolant reservoir tank to full mark. 3. Install radiator cap half-way and gently squeeze coolant hoses to force any trapped air out of system. 4. Again, remove radiator cap and slowly add coolant to the bottom of fill neck if required. 5. Start engine and observe coolant level in the radiator. Allow air to purge and top off as necessary. Reinstall radiator cap and bring engine to operating temperature. After engine is cool, check level in reservoir tank and add coolant if necessary. NOTE: Should the reservoir tank become empty, it will be necessary to refill at the radiator and repeat the bleeding procedure. 6. 7. ADD 8 OZ Drive slowly at first to gradually bring engine up to operating temperature. Vary throttle positions. Do not operate at sustained idle or sustained high speed. Perform regular checks on fluid levels, controls and all important areas on the vehicle. Pull only light loads during initial break in. Change break in oil and filter at 1 hour or 100 miles. 3.9 ENGINE Crankshaft Straightening 3. Lubricate the bearings and clamp the crankshaft securely in the crankshaft alignment fixture. Refer to the illustrations below. If the crank rod pin location is 180o from the dial indicator (opposite that shown), it will be necessary to spread the crankshaft at position A as shown in the illustration below. When rebuilding and straightening a crankshaft, runout must be as close to zero as possible. Crankshaft Alignment Fixture HIGH .002 (.05 mm) (PN 2870569) A A HIGH .005 (.13 mm) NOTE: The rod pin position in relation to the dial indicator position tells you what action is required to straighten the shaft. 1. To correct a situation like the one shown in the illustration, strike the shaft at point A with a brass hammer. HIGH .004 (.1 mm) A HIGH .004 (.1 mm) NOTE: Maximum allowable runout is .0024”. ES50PL Engine Lubrication Oil Type: Polaris PS-4 Synthetic (PN 2874414) B SUPPORT CRANKSHAFT HERE 2. To correct a situation like the one shown in the illustration, squeeze the crankshaft at points A. (Use tool from alignment kit). HIGH .002 (.05 mm) HIGH .005 (.13 mm) Capacity: Approximately 2.25 U.S. Quarts (2.1L) Filter: (PN 3088036) Drain Plug / Screen Fitting: 14.8 - 17 ft. lbs. (20-23 Nm) (If fitting is removed, follow oil pump priming procedure). Oil Pressure Specification: 20 PSI @ 5500 RPM, Polaris PS-4 Synthetic (Engine Hot) Oil Pressure Test A A 1. 2. Remove blind plug on front right oil filter cover. Insert a 1/8 NPT oil pressure gauge adaptor and attach the gauge. 3. Start engine and allow it to reach operating temperature, monitoring gauge indicator. NOTE: Use only Polaris PS-4 Synthetic Engine Lubricant (PN 2874414). Oil Pressure at 5500 RPM (Engine Hot): Standard: 20 PSI Minimum: 12 PSI 3.10 RepairPro Service Manual ENGINE Oil Pump Priming Procedure Oil Flow - ES50PL NOTE: The oil pump priming procedure should be performed as a safeguard against loss of pump prime when repairing oil tank, lines or engine. The chart on Page 3.12 describes the flow of oil through the ES50PL engine. Beginning at the oil tank, the oil flows through a screen fitting in the bottom of the tank and into the oil supply hose. The feed side of the oil pump draws oil through the hose and into the crankcase oil gallery, pulling the oil through another passage to the one way valve. When the engine is off, the one way valve closes to prevent oil in the tank from draining into the crankcase. Oil is then pumped to the oil filter. If the oil filter is obstructed, a bypass valve contained in the filter allows oil to bypass the filter element. 1. Clamp or pinch off vent line approximately 2” from oil tank, between the end of oil tank vent fitting and the vent line. 2. Run engine for 5-10 seconds at IDLE. IMPORTANT: Do not raise rpm or run for more than 10 seconds. Damage to tank may result. 3. Shut off engine. Remove the vent line clamp. The oil pump should now be properly primed and ready for field operation. NOTE: If the system is primed properly you should hear some air release. If you do not, the system has not primed. Repeat the process if necessary. At this point, the oil is diverted in three directions. Oil is supplied to the crankshaft through a PTO side oil passage, lubricating the crank bearings, crank pin, piston, cylinder and connecting rod bearings. A delivery pipe supplies oil to the top of the cylinder head and the transmission main shaft. Oil is delivered though the pipe and enters the camshaft through the cam support oil gallery. The camshaft journals are lubricated through holes in the camshaft. Oil lubricates the cam chain sprockets and cam lobes via an oil jet, which drains to the crankcase. Another oil path flows from the delivery pipe to the transmission main shaft. Here it passes through the oil gallery to lubricate the transmission gears, clutch and bearings. Residual oil from the lubrication of the crankshaft and connecting rod indirectly lubricates the cylinder wall, piston, rings, connecting rod small end bearing, piston pin, oil/water pump drive gears, cam chain, drive sprocket, and Magneto end crankshaft main bearing. A one–way valve is located on the right front (PTO) side of the crankcase. This valve prevents oil in the tank from draining into the engine crankcase when the engine is off. The valve mechanism consists of a plunger, return spring, guide plug, and sealing washer. When the engine is running, oil pressure lifts the plunger off the seat, allowing oil flow. When the engine is off, spring pressure forces the plunger against the oil passage seat, preventing oil flow from the tank to the sump. The one–way valve requires very little maintenance. If engine oil drains into the crankcase when the engine is off, inspect the valve sealing surface for debris or damage. Inspect the return spring for distortion or damage. 3.11 3 ENGINE ES50PL Oil Flow Chart Top of Oil Tank Oil Tank Oil Hose Oil Pump (Scavenging) Crankcase (Clutch Side) Oil Gallery Crankcase (Mag Side) Oil Gallery Oil Hose Oil Strainer Crankcase Crankcase (Mag Side) Oil Gallery Cylinder Cam Chain Indirect Lubrication Prevents oil from draining into crankcase with engine off Cam & Crank Sprocket Piston Crankcase (Clutch Side) Oil Gallery Connecting Rod (Small End) Oil Pump (Feed) Large End Bearing Chain Room Ball Bearing (Mag Side) Cam Lobe Cam Shaft Journal Valve Lifter One Way Valve Oil Jet Bypass Crank Pin Oil Filter Delivery Pipe Crankshaft Oil Shaft Gears Cam Support Oil Gallery Cylinder Head Oil Gallery Indirect Lubrication 3.12 Transmission Main Shaft Gears & Clutch Transmission Counter Shaft Gears RepairPro Service Manual ENGINE ES50PL Engine Exploded Views Crankcase / Transmission Cylinder / Cylinder Head 3 Crankshaft and Piston Valve Train 3.13 ENGINE UPPER ENGINE DISASSEMBLY 6. If tensioner remains in place, tap lightly on tensioner body with a soft face hammer and remove tensioner. Disassembly CAUTION REFER TO PAGE 3.8-3.9 FOR ENGINE REMOVAL / INSTALLATION NOTES The assembly is under spring tension. Maintain inward pressure while removing. Cam Chain Tensioner Removal 1. Remove ignition timing inspection plug from recoil housing. To position crankshaft at Top Dead Center (TDC) on the compression stroke: 2. 3. Rotate engine slowly in the direction of rotation watching intake valves open and start to close. Continue to rotate engine slowly, watching for the camshaft sprocket marks and the indicator mark in the timing inspection hole. 7. For installation, retract the plunger using the special tool and reverse the installation procedures using a new gasket. Tighten bolts to specification. (Page 3.3) Cam Chain Tensioner Inspection and Reassembly NOTE: The cam tensioner assembly is not a serviceable item. Replace assembly if problems are found. Spring tension may be relieved using the special tool prior to removal, but is not necessary. A TDC Case Mark B A- Tool PN PA-45958 B- 10mm tensioner cap TDC Line (Left of the “T”) 4. Align the indicator mark on flywheel with the indent in the inspection hole and the cam sprocket marks (facing upward) aligned with the dots at the 12 o’clock and 9 o’clock positions. NOTE: The cam lobes should be laying flat and the valves have clearance at this point. 5. Remove the two 8 x 25 mm cam chain tensioner flange bolts. 1. 2. 3. When removed, the cam chain tensioner plunger should be extended outward to the end of its travel. Verify and inspect the plunger for wear or damage. Push on the plunger. The plunger should not move in and out of the tensioner body. To release the plunger tension and prepare for reassembly, remove the 10mm plug and insert the Cam Chain Tensioner Tool (PA-45958), lodging the tip of the tool into the spring Tool PA-45958 IMPORTANT Maintain Clearance while rotating tool 3.14 RepairPro Service Manual ENGINE To retract the plunger, rotate the special tool clockwise while holding the tensioner stationary. You may also hold the special tool stationary and rotate the tensioner assembly counterclockwise if desired. IMPORTANT: Do not grind edges of key flange into tensioner to prevent damage to the tool or locking guides during plunger retraction. 4. 5. 6. 4. Once retraction is complete, lock the tool into the tensioner guides. This holds the spring and plunger in place for reassembly. Use caution not to disturb the tool during tensioner installation. To free the cam assembly, lift one cam assembly and slightly rotate it while removing the chain from the cam gear. Repeat this procedure for the other cam. NOTE: Do not allow cam chain to drop into the engine if no other disassembly is being performed. 5. Use a device to secure the cam chain, such as mechanic’s wire or nylon line, to prevent it from falling into the engine. Inspect cam sprocket teeth for wear or damage. If damage is found, replace the camshaft assembly. 3 Inspect for Areas of Tooth Wear or Damage Automatic Compression Release Inspection 6. Reinstall the tensioner assembly, torquing the bolts to specification (Page 3.3). Remove the special tool and replace the tensioner cap. Tensioner Bolt Torque NOTE: The automatic compression release mechanism cannot be serviced. The components are not replaceable. Replace the camshaft as an assembly if any part of the compression release is worn or damaged. 6.6- 8.1 ft lbs (9- 11 Nm) C Camshaft Removal 1. 2. 3. A Remove the valve cover. Remove the tensioner assembly. Remove the 8 bolts securing the cam tower assembly and remove the cover. B Note: Cam and compression release are an assembly and not serviceable. 1. 2. Check release cam (A) for smooth operation throughout the entire range of movement. The spring (B) should hold the cam against the stop. In this position, the actuator (C) will be held outward in the compression release mode. Inspect lobe on end of release cam for wear. Replace cam assembly if necessary. 3.15 ENGINE Camshaft Inspection 5. Measure ID of camshaft journal bore. 1. Visually inspect each cam lobe for wear, chafing or damage. NOTE: Camshafts, gears and bearings are not serviceable. Replace camshaft as an assembly if problems are found. 2. 3. Inspect the cam bearings for excess play or noise during rotation. Measure height of each cam lobe using a micrometer. Compare to specifications. Camshaft Journal I.D.: Mag End: .9842- .9851ð (25.00- 25.021 mm) NOTE: Replace camshaft as an assembly if damaged or if any part is worn past the service limit. 6. Calculate oil clearance by subtracting journal OD from journal bore ID. Compare to specifications. Camshaft Oil Clearance Limit: .0039ð (.10 mm) NOTE: Replace cylinder head if camshaft journal bore is damaged or worn excessively. Cylinder Head Removal 1. 2. 3. Camshaft Lobe Height Remove the cam shafts. Remove the two 8mm flange bolts (A) from cylinder head. Loosen each of the four cylinder head bolts (B) with a 14mm 12-point socket, turning evenly 1/8 turn each time in a criss–cross pattern until loose. Limit: 1.6555ð (42.05 mm) 4. B Measure camshaft journal outside diameter (O.D.) A Check for wear or roughness Journal O.D. 4. Camshaft Journal O.D.: CAUTION Mag End: .9821- .9828ð (24.946- 24.963 mm) Tap only in reinforced areas or on thick parts of cylinder head casting to avoid damaging the head. 5. 3.16 Remove bolts (B) and tap cylinder head lightly with a softface hammer until loose. Remove cylinder head and head gasket. RepairPro Service Manual ENGINE Cylinder and Piston Removal 4. NOTE: Follow engine disassembly procedures to remove valve cover, camshafts and cylinder head. Removal of clutch basket is required for this procedure. 5. 1. 1. Using a 9/32” (7mm) Allen wrench, remove the rear cam chain tensioner blade from the cylinder. Rock cylinder forward and backward and lift it from the crankcase, exposing the piston and connecting rod. Support piston with Piston Support Block (PN 2870390). Remove dowel pins from crankcase. Piston Removal Remove circlip. Note piston directional aid that is pointing toward the left (stator) side of engine. Directional Aid 2. Loosen the 3 oil pipe banjo bolts, remove the bolts and sealing washers. Remove the pipes. 3. Tap cylinder lightly with a plastic hammer in reinforced areas until loose. 3 2. Remove piston circlip and push piston pin out of piston. If necessary, heat the crown of the piston slightly with a propane torch to aid removal. IMPORTANT: Do not apply heat to the piston rings. The ring may lose radial tension. 3. Remove top compression ring: *Using a piston ring pliers: Carefully expand ring and lift it off the piston. *By hand: Placing both thumbs as shown, spread the ring open and push up on the opposite side. Take care to not scratch the ring lands. IMPORTANT: Do not expand the ring more than the amount necessary to remove it from the piston, or the ring may break. 3.17 ENGINE 4. 5. Repeat procedure for second ring. The oil control ring is a three piece design consisting of a top and bottom steel rail and center expander section. Remove the top rail first followed by the bottom rail, then remove the expander. For installation, refer to Page 3.31. 3. Measure piston ring to groove clearance by placing the ring in the ring land and measuring with a thickness gauge. Replace piston and rings if ring–to–groove clearance exceeds service limits. Piston Piston and Rod Inspection 1. Ring Measure piston pin bore. Feeler Gauge Piston Pin Bore Piston Ring-to-Groove Clearance Piston Pin Bore: Top Ring Limit: .0059″ (.15 mm) Second Ring Limit: .0059″ (.15 mm) .9055- .9057″ (23.001- 23.007 mm) 2. Measure piston pin O.D. Replace piston and/or piston pin if out of tolerance. 4. Measure connecting rod small end ID. Piston Pin Measurement Locations Piston Pin O.D. .9053- .9065″ (22.994- 23 mm) 3.18 Small End I.D. : Std: .9058- .9063″ (23.007- 23.020 mm) RepairPro Service Manual ENGINE LOWER ENGINE DISASSEMBLY 5. Crankcase Disassembly and Inspection Measure the ID of the bushing in the stator housing (A) and the crankcase and record. Measure in two directions 90° apart to determine if cover is out of round. Replace cover if clearance is determined to be excessive. NOTE: The starter motor, starter drive gears, flywheel, stator, cam chain and sprockets can be serviced with the engine in the frame. NOTE: Crankcase and transmission components cannot be serviced in the frame. Upper engine components, with the exception of the starter and stator removal, must be disassembled prior to performing these procedures. 3 A Starter Drive Gears Removal and Inspection 1. 2. Remove the starter. Remove the 12 bolts holding the stator cover assembly. 6. 7. Inspect gear teeth on starter drive gears. Replace gears if gear teeth are cracked, worn, or broken. Installation: Reverse the removal procedures and install with a new gasket. Do not use sealant. Torque the bolts in a criss-cross pattern to 80–97 in. lbs. (9–11 Nm). Flywheel / One-Way Starter Clutch Removal and Inspection 1. Remove flywheel nut and washer. 2. Install Flywheel Puller (PA-46075) and remove flywheel. IMPORTANT: Thread the puller onto the flywheel fully or flywheel threads may be damaged. 3. Inspect the drive gears and shafts for wear or damage and replace if necessary. 4. Measure the OD of the starter drive shafts on both ends and record. Measure in two directions 90° apart to determine if components are out of round. Replace if components are worn or damaged. 3.19 ENGINE 3. Removing the flywheel exposes the starter drive main gear and one way clutch, which is mounted on the flywheel. Inspect the main gear and bearing for wear, broken teeth or other damage. Inspect the one-way clutch for wear or damage to the rollers, springs, etc. Replace one-way assembly if excessive wear or damage is found. Crankshaft Nut Removal 1. Remove the stator-side crankshaft nut using MAG End Crankshaft Nut Remover/Installer (PN PA-46076) while using a suitable holding fixture to keep the crankshaft from turning. PA -46 07 6 2. 4. To replace the one-way starter clutch, remove the 8 screws (A) holding the assembly to the flywheel. Reinstall the screws and torque to 155-133 in. lbs. (13-15 Nm) in a crisscross pattern. To reinstall, use a suitable holding fixture and MAG End Crankshaft Nut Remover/Installer (PN PA-46076) to torque the nut to 66-81 ft. lbs. (90–110 Nm). Clutch Cover / Clutch Removal and Inspection 1. Remove the 12 screws holding the clutch cover. 2. Remove the gasket. Clean the gasket surfaces prior to reassembly. A 5. Installation: For installation of flywheel and starter gears, reverse the removal procedures. When installing the flywheel, apply engine oil to the crankshaft threads and torque the flywheel nut to 111-125 ft. lbs. (150-170 Nm). 3.20 RepairPro Service Manual ENGINE 3. Inspect or replace the crankshaft oil seal anytime the clutch cover is removed for service. Install with the seal lip pointed in toward the cover. 6. Remove the clutch plates and friction discs, keeping them in order. Inspect the pressure plates for wear and warpage. Inspect the friction plates for wear or damage to friction material. If either are damaged or worn excessively, replace the components as a set. NOTE: Replace clutch pack if measured thickness of friction material is less than .110” (2.8mm). The top plate has slightly different friction pads and should always be installed on top. NOTE: Top Clutch Plate Aligns In Basket Towers Top 4. Remove the 6 screws holding the clutch pressure plate. NOTE: The top clutch plate should rest in the towers. CAUTION Assembly is under spring pressure. Wear safety glasses during removal. 7. NOTE: Top Clutch Plate Aligns In Basket Towers To remove the clutch basket, remove the plunger from the center of the clutch and de-stake the nut to avoid damaging the threads upon removal. NOTE: Nut is staked on flat of transmission shaft 5. Remove and inspect the clutch pressure plate for wear, cracks, etc. Check bearing for wear and smooth rotation. Replace either component if found to be damaged or worn. 8. Installation: Reverse the procedures. Using a new nut, torque the clutch basket retaining nut to 66-81 ft. lbs. (90110 Nm). Stake the nut at the flat on the transmission shaft. Install the clutch plates in order of removal. Reinsert the plunger into the shaft. Reinstall the cover, pressure plate screws and springs. Torque the screws to 80–97 in. lbs. (9–11 Nm). 3.21 3 ENGINE Shifter Component Removal and Inspection 1. 3. With the clutch basket removed, remove the shift shaft assembly (A), guide plate (D), pawl assembly (B), and stopper arm / detent spring assembly (C). Inspect the ratcher pawls (F), pawl plungers (G), plunger springs (H), shifter collar (J), shifter drum (K) and guide plate (L) for wear or damage. Replace if wear or damage is evident. J CAUTION F G Stopper arm (C) is under spring pressure. Use care during removal. H L K A 4. B D C 2. Installation: Reverse the procedures, paying close attention to the orientation of the ratcher pawls (F) during installation, as the surface must be flat when the pawls are installed correctly. The guide plat (L) should be installed with the “dot” facing upward. Torque the guide plate bolts, the detent spring assembly bolt and the shifter pin bolt (E) to 80–97 in. lbs. (9–11 Nm). Remove the shift cam by loosening the shifter pin bolt (E). E L Correct for installation - Flat Surface Correct for installation 3.22 RepairPro Service Manual ENGINE Oil Pump Removal and Inspection 1. Remove the circlip holding the oil pump gear and remove the gear. NOTE: Dowel pins for the inner pump body are loose and may become lost. Keep pins in a secure location. 3 2. Remove the 3 bolts holding the oil pump cover. Inspect the inside of the cover for wear or scoring. 5. Replace any component that is found to be damaged or worn. OIL PUMP CLEARANCE Limits are same as Standard Body Feed / Scavenge .006-.008” .15 - .21mm Rotor Tip Feed / Scavenge Less than .006” Less than .15 mm Rotor Side Feed Scavenge 3. Remove the outer pump rotor assembly. Inspect for signs of scoring or excess wear. NOTE: Cross pins for the pump rotors are loose and may become lost. Keep pins in a secure location. 6. .0007-.003” .02 - .08mm .002-.006” .05 - .16mm Installation: Reverse the procedures. Use assembly lube or clean engine oil to coat the parts before assembly. Tighten the cover bolts to 80–97 in. lbs.(9–11 Nm). Verify the pump turns freely during and after torquing bolts. Crankshaft Drive and Cam Gear Removal 1. Remove the crankshaft nut, washer and drive gear. Note and white-mark the double spline on both gears and shaft for ease of reassembly. Double Spline 4. Remove the inner pump chamber and pump rotor assembly. Inspect these components for wear or scoring. 3.23 ENGINE 2. 3. Remove the cam gear and thrustwasher from the crankshaft for inspection. Replace if damage or excessive wear is present to the gear teeth or splines. Installation: Reverse the procedures and torque nut to 81– 96 ft. lbs. (110–130 Nm). Crankcase Separation 1. Remove the 13 flange bolts. 12 from the magneto side and 1 from the clutch side of the crankcase evenly in a criss– cross pattern. 2. Remove the shifter assembly and shift cog that is attached to the shift drum (Items A-E). Cam Chain / Tensioner Blade Removal 1. Remove bolt (A) securing tensioner pivot blade to crankcase . Inspect for cracks, wear, or damage. A 2. Remove cam chain (B). Inspect chain for wear, missing rollers or damage. Stretch chain tight on a flat surface and apply a 10 lb. (4.53 kg) load. Measure length of a 20 pitch (pin) section of chain. Replace if worn past service limit. B A B D C E Chain Service Limit: 5.407” (13.7 cm) 3. 4. Installation: Reverse the procedures and torque the pivot blade bolt to 10–12.2 ft. lbs. (13.5–16.5 Nm). See Page 3.32 for Cam Timing. 3.24 RepairPro Service Manual ENGINE 3. Separate crankcase by tapping with a soft faced hammer in reinforced areas. Watch the gap along the crankcase mating surface, making sure to separate the crankcase evenly. It may also be necessary to tap the clutch side of the crankshaft lightly to help separate the crankcase. NOTE: Due to extremely close tolerances and minimal wear, the bearings must be inspected visually, and by feel. Look for signs of discoloration, scoring or galling. Turn the inner race of each bearing. The bearings should turn smoothly and quietly. The outer race of each bearing should fit tightly in the crankcase. The inner race should be firm with minimal side to side movement and no detectable up and down movement. Bearing Removal: NOTE: To ease bearing removal, warm the bearing area, but not the bearing itself, until hot to the touch to expand the bearing cavity. CAUTION 4. The crankshaft is designed to slip out of the PTO side upon disassembly. Once the crankcase halves are split apart, orientate the components into the stator side of the crankcase containing the crankshaft, balancer, oil gallery, the transmission gears and shift components for ease of service and reassembly. Crankcase Inspection 1. 2. Remove all traces of gasket sealer from the crankcase mating surfaces. Inspect the surfaces closely for nicks, burrs or damage. Check the oil pump and oil passage mating surfaces to be sure they are clean and not damaged. Verify the oil pump screen is clean. Wear the appropriate safety equipment during the heating and removal process. 1. Support the crankcase and drive or press the main bearings out of each crankcase. 2. To remove balancer shaft bearings and pump shaft bearing, use a blind-hole bearing puller. NOTE: Bearings are stressed during the removal process and should not be re–used! Bearing Installation: NOTE: For ease of bearing installation, warm the crankcase until hot to the touch to expand the bearing cavity. Place the bearings in a freezer. This shrinks the bearing outer diameter slightly. Crankcase Bearing Inspection / Removal / Installation 1. CAUTION Inspect the crankshaft main bearings, balancer shaft bearings, output shaft, and pump shaft bearings. Wear the appropriate safety equipment during the heating and installation process. 1. 2. Install the bearings so the numbers are visible. Drive or press new bearings into the crankcases, using the proper driver. IMPORTANT: Press only on outer race of bearing to prevent bearing damage. 3.25 3 ENGINE TRANSMISSION AND CRANKSHAFT SERVICE 3. Transmission Removal and Inspection 4. 1. Remove the shift fork tubes, spring, shift forks, and shift drum from the transmission assembly. Inspect the shaft support bearings in the crankcase halves. Replace if any roughness or wear is felt. See page 3.25 for crankcase bearing inspection / removal. To reassemble, reverse the procedures using the photos for reference. Transmission Main Shaft Disassembly / Assembly CAUTION These procedures require the use of a heat source and hydraulic press to remove and install components. Wear the proper protective and safety gear to prevent injury. 2. 1. Attach a bearing splitter to the reverse gear ONLY as shown. DO NOT apply a load to 4th gear, as damage will result. Place the assembly into a hydraulic press and using a suitable driver, press off the gear. 2. Remove the parts from the shaft, keeping them in order for ease of reassembly. Inspect all the main shaft components for signs of damage or wear. If the mating or rolling surfaces on any of the components are found to be rounded, worn, or otherwise damaged or rough, they must be replaced. Remove the main and output transmission shaft assemblies and disassemble, keeping the parts in order for ease of reassembly. Inspect the shift forks, shift drum, shift dogs, gear teeth and shaft splines for damage. If the mating surfaces on any of the components are found to be rounded, worn, or otherwise damaged, they must be replaced. Main Shaft Assembly Output Shaft Assembly 3.26 RepairPro Service Manual ENGINE 3. 4. To reassemble the main shaft, install the components in the order removed. Before pressing the reverse gear onto the main shaft, heat the reverse gear in an oil bath if desired. This will expand and ease pressing of the gear to the specified dimension. 1. Insert the output shaft assembly, minus the outer gear into the stator side casehalve. Do not insert outer gear or shift fork pins at this time. CAUTION This procedure requires the use of a heat source and hydraulic press to install components. Wear the proper protective and safety gear to prevent injury. 5. 3 Support the mainshaft as shown with flat blocks. Press ONLY on the reverse gear until the total width of the gear set measures 120.4 ± .2mm (4.74 ± .008″) as shown. 2. Insert the reverse gear shaft assembly. Verify the alignment pin (A) has seated into the casehalf. A Main Shaft Gear Set Width 120.4 + .2 mm (4.74 + .008″) Transmission Reassembly NOTE: Installation of the transmission assemblies can be facilitated by constantly rocking or moving them to reduce binding during assembly. NOTE: Do not to allow transmission parts to fall from their assemblies during installation. Parts that are out of alignment will cause improper casehalf mating, resulting in transmission binding. Use of assembly lube to “stick” parts together for ease of installation is recommended. 3.27 ENGINE 3. Install the main shaft assembly. The outer gear can now be installed. Verify the shallow side of the outer gear is facing out during installation. 5. Insert and rotate the shift drum so the alignment pin is approximately at the 5 o’clock position. Insert the fork pins into their respective cam followers, installing each fork shaft as they are assembled. Lifting of forks and gears will be required to align pins into the shift drum. Pin Position NOTE: The output fork shaft contains a spring that must be inserted before assembly. See Photo. Spring 4. Install the shift forks. Verify that each fork pin is pointed toward the shift drum. 3.28 RepairPro Service Manual ENGINE Crankshaft Removal / Installation 6. To remove crankshaft: 1. Remove the crankshaft retaining nut using Crankshaft Nut Remover / Installer (PA-46076). 2. Remove the crankshaft bearing retainer screws using a impact driver at location (A). NOTE: Screw threads contain locking agent. Heating of screws is required for removal. Use caution and wear the proper safety equipment while performing this procedure. Using MAG End Crankshaft Installer (PA-46077), draw the crankshaft into the bearing assembly by sliding the collar and thrustwasher over the crankshaft end, threading the inner puller onto the crankshaft end. Turn the outer nut clockwise while holding the inner to pull the crankshaft into the bearing. PA-46077 Inner Puller Outer Puller 3 Thrust Washer PTO side shown for clarity Collar A Crankshaft Inspection 3. 4. Support the stator side crankcase in a stand to press the crankshaft out. Use care not to damage the crankcase mating surface or connecting rod. Applying heat to the crankcase bearing area to ease removal is acceptable. Attach Crankcase Separator (PA-46087) to the casehalve. Turn the inner shaft clockwise while holding the outer shaft to press the crankshaft and bearing as an assembly out of the case. Verify that all bolts are PA-46087 fully threaded to avoid damage to the case NOTE: Larger than excessive wear. standard readings indicate NOTE: Crankshaft components are press-fit and are serviceable. 1. 2. Inspect the crankshaft connecting rod bearing journal for scoring and abnormal wear. Use a feeler gauge to measure the connecting rod big end side clearance. To install crankshaft: 5. Press the bearing into the crankcase at the outer edges with an appropriate driver. Insert the bearing retainers and new screws, which have a pre-applied locking agent. Torque the screws to 8.1–9.6 ft. lbs. (11–13 Nm). Connecting Rod Big End Side Clearance: Limit: .0256″ (.65 mm) 3.29 ENGINE 3. Place the crankshaft in a truing stand or V–blocks and measure the runout on both ends with a dial indicator. See Crankshaft Straightening on Page 3.10. 3. Reassemble the crankcase halves. This is best accomplished with the stator side casehalve settled in a suitable fixture that allows it to lay flat. This allows easier installation without parts falling out of position. Make sure the oil gallery tube is oriented correctly and the balancer shaft groove aligns with the water pump shaft. Refer to photos. NOTE: Some light tapping with a soft faced mallet may be required to bring the casehalves together. If for any reason the cases fail to mate, DO NOT FORCE. Reverify the transmission assemblies are fully seated in their respective case half and are not binding. Align balancer shaft and water pump shaft grooves Max Runout: .0012″ (.03 mm) 4. Measure the connecting rod big end radial clearance. Big End Radial Clearance: Limit: .0004- .0015″ (.011- .038 mm) 5. Measure the connecting rod small end radial clearance. Small End Radial Clearance: Limit: .0020″ (.05 mm) Pin 6. Measure the connecting rod small end I.D. Small End I.D. : Std: .9058- .9063″ (23.007- 23.020 mm) ENGINE REASSEMBLY Verify pin is aligned with notch in case Crankcase Reassembly 1. 2. Apply a thin layer of Crankcase Sealer (PN 2871557) to all sealing surfaces of the PTO case half, being careful not to over apply, as excessive sealant may clog oil passages or drip into the crankcase. Allow the sealer to set for a few minutes before assembling the two halves together. Align the crankshaft and balancer timing marks and insert the components into the stator-side case halve. Then install the oil tube and transmission assemblies. 3.30 4. Reinstall the (12) stator side and (1) clutch side flange bolts, tightening in a criss-cross pattern. Stop occasionally and check that all rotating assemblies turn freely. Torque the flange bolts to 80–97 in. lbs. (9–11 Nm). RepairPro Service Manual ENGINE Piston Installation Piston Ring Installation 1. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to all ring surfaces and ring lands. Always check piston ring installed gap before rings are installed on piston. If the piston has been in service, clean any accumulated carbon from the ring grooves and oil control ring holes. 2. Clean the gasket surfaces on the cylinder and crankcase. Remove all traces of old gasket material. Make sure the cylinder mounting bolt holes are clean and free of debris. 1. 2. 3. Place the oil control ring expander in oil ring groove with the end gap facing forward. The expander has no up or down marking and can be installed either way. The ends should butt squarely together and must not overlap. Install the bottom and top rails. Install the second ring with the mark facing up. Install the top ring with the mark facing up. Ring Profile Gap should face up or down 3. Top - Chrome Install a new circlip on one side of the piston with the end gap facing up or down. CAUTION Circlips become deformed during the removal process. Do not re–use old circlips. Do not compress the new clip more than necessary upon installation to prevent loss of radial tension. Severe engine damage may result if circlips are re–used or deformed during installation. 4. Install with mark facing up Apply clean engine oil to the piston rings, ring lands, piston pin bore, piston pin, and piston skirt. Lubricate the connecting rod (both ends), balancer drive gear, and crankshaft main bearing area. Top Side of Piston Second - Cast Identification Mark 4. Stator Side 5. 5. 6. Check to make sure the rings rotate freely in the groove when compressed. Orientate the rings for installation by rotating until the endgaps are 120 degrees apart. Install the piston on the connecting rod with the identification mark facing the stator end of the crankshaft. The piston pin should be a push fit in the piston. Install the other circlip with the gap facing up or down. (see Caution with Step 3 above). Push the piston pin in both directions to make sure the clips are properly seated in the groove. 3.31 3 ENGINE Cylinder Installation Cam Chain Installation 1. NOTE: The camshafts, crankshaft sprocket and clutch basket must be removed to perform this procedure. Place the dowel pins in the crankcase and install a new cylinder base gasket. 1. Install the cam chain by dropping it down through the chain room and over the crankshaft sprocket. 2. Use a suitable device to hold the chain in place to keep it from dropping through the chain room, such as wire or a hammer handle. PN 2870390 2. Position the Piston Support Block (P/N 2870390) beneath the piston skirt to support the piston during cylinder installation. 3. Apply clean engine oil to the ring compressor and install the compressor according to the manufacturer’s instructions. IMPORTANT: Verify all ring end gaps are correctly located. Camshaft Timing CAUTION Serious engine damage will result if the camshaft is not properly timed to the crankshaft. IMPORTANT: CAMSHAFT TIMING NOTE The Top Dead Center (TDC) mark is used to time the camshaft to the crankshaft. Follow the procedures outlined. Refer to the diagram. 1. 4. Apply clean engine oil liberally to the cylinder bore and tapered area of the sleeve. Install the cylinder with a slight rocking motion until the rings are captive in the sleeve. 5. Remove the ring compressor and support block. 6. Push the cylinder downward until fully seated on the base gasket. 7. Rotate the crankshaft and position the piston at TDC. NOTE: If cam chain is installed, hold it up while rotating the engine to avoid damage to the chain, drive sprocket teeth, or tensioner blade. 3.32 2. Apply engine oil or assembly lube to the camshaft main journals, cam lobes and the automatic compression release mechanism. Install the crankshaft cam sprocket onto the shaft. Note the double spline for ease of installation. The alignment mark should face outward. RepairPro Service Manual ENGINE 3. If not already at Top Dead Center, Loosely hold the cam chain and rotate the crankshaft until the crankshaft cam sprocket timing mark is aligned with the Top Dead Center (TDC) mark on the crankcase (see photo). Position the chain for correct timing by aligning the bottom cam timing mark with the brass colored bottom chain link. Keep tension on the chain so as to not lose chain alignment at the crankshaft sprocket during cam installation. Align Brass Colored Link and Sprocket Mark with Top Dead Center (TDC) Mark 6. Re-check all cam timing marks to verify proper cam timing, and install the cam tower. Tighten the bolts evenly in a criss-cross pattern to specification. Do not rotate engine until the tensioner has been installed to avoid chain slip and loss of timing reference. 7. Install the tensioner assembly. (raefer to Page 3.14). Verify timing by rotating the crankshaft two full revolutions (720 degrees), checking for valve-to-piston interference which would indicate a problem with cam timing. If interference is noted, immediately stop rotation and reverify cam timing. NOTE: Rotating the engine during verification will cause the timing alignment marks to rotate out of phase, and will take as many as 20 revolutions to come back into phase. To maintain alignment of the marks if needed, rotate the engine backward the same number of turns as forward. 8. 4. Install the camshafts one at a time. First, install the exhaust cam by looping the chain over the cam gear. At the same time, position the cam chain for correct timing by aligning the brass colored chain link with the 12 o’clock dot on the cam sprocket. The sprocket secondary mark should be at the 9 o’clock position. Keep tension on the chain so as to not lose chain alignment at the crankshaft sprocket. 5. Next, install the intake cam, positioning the upper cam chain for correct timing by aligning the remaining brass colored chain link with the 12 o’clock dot on the cam sprocket. Timing is in phase when all three brass colored cam chain links align with all three sprocket timing marks and the secondary cam gear marks are at approximately the 9 o’clock position, with the exhaust cam timing mark slightly advanced. Refer to the diagram on Page 3.34. NOTE: Failure to align marks in this fashion will cause valve-to-piston interference, resulting in engine damage. Align Brass Colored Link and Sprocket Mark with Top Dead Center (TDC) Mark With timing procedure completed, install the primary drive sprocket, washer and nut onto the crankshaft. Torque to specification. Primary Drive Gear Installation 1. 2. Install the cam sprocket with alignment mark outward. With chain in place and cam timing having been performed, install the primary drive sprocket, washer and nut onto the crankshaft. Torque to 81–96 ft. lbs. (110–130 Nm). Note exhaust cam is slightly advanced 3.33 3 ENGINE Outlaw Cam Timing Exploded View 3.34 RepairPro Service Manual ENGINE CYLINDER HEAD SERVICE Cylinder Head Disassembly Cylinder Head Inspection WARNING Wear eye protection during cylinder head disassembly and reassembly. 1. Remove the valve buckets (A). NOTE: Keep all parts in order with respect to their location in the cylinder head. Use care not to mar or damage the buckets upon removal. A 1. Thoroughly clean cylinder head surface to remove all traces of gasket material and carbon. CAUTION Use care not to damage sealing surface. Cylinder Head Warp 1. Lay a straight edge across the surface of the cylinder head at several different points and measure warp by inserting a feeler gauge between the straight edge and the cylinder head surface. If measurement exceeds the service limit, replace the cylinder head. 2. Under each bucket is a valve shim (B). Record and keep these shims oriented to each valve disassembled. B 3. Using Valve Spring Compressor (A) (PA-46502), compress the valve springs and remove the split keepers. Cylinder Head Warp Limit: .002″ (.05 mm) 3.35 3 ENGINE NOTE: To prevent loss of tension, do not compress the valve springs more than necessary. NOTE: Replace seals whenever the cylinder head is disassembled. Hardened, cracked or worn valve seals will cause excessive oil consumption and carbon buildup. A 4. Remove spring retainer, inner and outer springs and spring washer. Spring Washer Located Below Assembly Cylinder Head Valve Guide / Valve Seat Inspection Inspect valve seats in cylinder head for pitting, burnt spots, roughness, and uneven surface. If any of the described conditions exist, the valve seat must be reconditioned. If the valve seat is cracked the cylinder head must be replaced. B NOTE: Servicing the valve guides and valve seats requires special tools and a thorough knowledge of reconditioning techniques. Follow the instructions provided in the cylinder head service tool kit. CAUTION NOTE: The valve springs should be positioned with the tightly wound coils against the cylinder head (B). 5. 6. Push valve out, keeping it in order for reassembly in the same guide. Measure free length of the inner and outer springs with a Vernier caliper. Check springs for squareness. Compare to specifications. Replace inner and outer springs as a set if either measurement is out of specification. Wear the proper safety equipment when performing cylinder head service. Valve guide replacement will require heating of the cylinder head. Wear safety gloves to prevent burns. Valve Guide Removal / Installation / Ream 1. Remove all carbon deposits from the combustion chamber, valve seat and valve guide area before attempting to remove valve guides. IMPORTANT: Carbon deposits are extremely abrasive and may damage the valve guide bore when guides are removed. 2. Inner 1.575” (40.0 mm) 3. Place new valve guides in a freezer for at least 15 minutes while heating cylinder head. Heat cylinder head in an oven or use a hot plate to bring cylinder head temperature to 212° F (100° C). Outer 1.650” (41.9 mm) 7. Remove the valve seals. 3.36 RepairPro Service Manual ENGINE IMPORTANT: Do not use a torch to heat cylinder head or warpage may result from uneven heating. Head temperature can be checked with a pyrometer or a welding temperature stick. Valve Seat Reconditioning 1. 4. When thoroughly heated, place cylinder head on blocks of wood which will allow the old guides to be removed. 5. Using valve guide driver, drive guides out of the cylinder head from the combustion chamber side. Be careful not to damage guide bore or valve seat when removing guides. 6. Place cylinder head on cylinder head table. NOTE: Be sure cylinder head is still at 212° F (100° C) before installing new guides. 7. Place a new guide in the valve guide installation tool and press guide in to proper depth. Check height of each guide above the cylinder head (A). Valve Guide Installed Height Valve Guide Height: .689- .709” (17.5 - 18.0 mm) Follow the manufacturers instructions provided with the Valve Seat Reconditioning Kit (P/N 2200634). Abrasive stone seat reconditioning equipment can also be used. Keep all valves in order with their respective seat. Valve Seat Wear Patterns 3 Too Wide Uneven Good Too Narrow NOTE: Valve seat width and point of contact on the valve face is very important for proper sealing. The valve must contact the valve seat over the entire circumference of the seat, and the seat must be the proper width all the way around. If the seat is uneven, compression leakage will result. If the seat is too wide, seat pressure is reduced, causing carbon accumulation and possible compression loss. If the seat is too narrow, heat transfer from valve to seat is reduced and the valve may overheat and warp, resulting in burnt valves. 2. 3. Install pilot into valve guide. Apply cutting oil to valve seat and cutter. 4. 5. Place 46° cutter on the pilot and make a light cut. Inspect the cut area of the seat: NOTE: The guide can also be inserted to the proper depth using a driver. Inspect the guide closely for cracks or damage if a driver is used. 8. Allow the cylinder head to cool to room temperature. Apply cutting oil to the reamer. Guides should be reamed from the valve spring side of the cylinder head. Ream each guide to size by turning the reamer clockwise continually. Continue to rotate reamer clockwise during removal of the tool. • If the contact area is less than 75% of the circumference of the seat, rotate the pilot 180° and make another light cut. 9. Clean guides thoroughly with hot soapy water and a nylon brush. Rinse and dry with compressed air. Apply clean engine oil to guides. • If the cutter now contacts the uncut portion of the seat, check the pilot. Look for burrs, nicks, or runout. If the pilot is bent it must be replaced. 3.37 ENGINE • If the contact area of the cutter is in the same place, the valve guide is distorted from improper installation and must be replaced. Be sure the cylinder head is at the proper temperature and replace the guide. Seat Contact Width • If the contact area of the initial cut is greater than 75%, continue to cut the seat until all pits are removed and a new seat surface is evident. NOTE: Remove only the amount necessary to repair the seat surface. of material Top 30o 6. 7. 8. To check the contact area of the seat on the valve face, apply a thin coating of Prussian Blue™ paste to the valve seat. If using an interference angle (46°) apply black permanent marker to the entire valve face (A). Insert valve into guide and tap valve lightly into place a few times. Remove valve and check where the Prussian Blue™ indicates seat contact on the valve face. The valve seat should contact the middle of the valve face or slightly above, and must be the proper width (refer to the wear limits for proper seat width). • If the indicated seat contact is at the top edge of the valve face and contacts the margin area it is too high on the valve face. Use the 30° cutter to lower the valve seat. • If too low use the 60° or 75° cutter to raise the seat. When contact area is centered on the valve face, measure seat width. • If the seat is too wide or uneven, use both top and bottom cutters to narrow the seat. • If the seat is too narrow, widen using the 45° cutter and re–check contact point on the valve face and seat width after each cut. Valve Seat Width: Seat 45o or 46o Bottom 60o or 75o NOTE: When using an interference angle, the seat contact point on the valve will be very narrow, and is a normal condition. Look for an even and continuous contact point on the black marker, all the way around the valve face. 9. Clean all filings from the area with hot soapy water, rinse, and dry with compressed air. 10. Lubricate the valve guides with clean engine oil, and apply oil or water based lapping compound to the face of the valve. NOTE: Lapping is not required with an interference angle. 11. Insert the valve into its respective guide and lap using a lapping tool or a section of fuel line connected to the valve stem. 12. Rotate the valve rapidly back and forth until the cut sounds smooth. Lift the valve slightly off of the seat, rotate 1/4 turn, and repeat the lapping process. Do this four to five times until the valve is fully seated, and repeat process for the other valve(s). 13. Clean cylinder head, valves, and camshaft oil supply passages thoroughly. Intake Std: .028” (.7 mm) Limit: .055” (1.4 mm) Exhaust Std: .039” (1.0 mm) Limit: .071” (1.8 mm) 3.38 RepairPro Service Manual ENGINE Valve Inspection 1. 2. Remove all carbon from valve with a soft wire wheel. Check valve face for runout, pitting, and burned spots. To check for bent valve stems, mount the valve in “V” blocks and use a dial indicator. 3 3. Check end of valve stem for flaring, pitting, wear or damage (A). A B 4. Inspect split keeper groove for wear or flaring of the keeper seat area (B). NOTE: The valves cannot be re–faced or end ground. Valves must be replaced if worn, bent, or damaged. 5. Measure diameter of valve stem with a micrometer in three places and in two different directions (six measurements total). Compare to specifications. Measure valve stem in several places Valve Stem Diameter: Intake: .2343- .2348″ (5.950- 5.965 mm) Exhaust: .2341- .2346″ (5.945- 5.960 mm) 3.39 ENGINE ES50PL Adjusting Pad Selection Matrix 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Measure valve clearance at TDC (Compression Stroke) using thickness gauge with original adjusting pad installed. Reference the measurement and the 3 digits marked on the existing adjusting pad on the matrix below. Select a suitable adjusting pad from the matrix below and replace existing pad. Measure and confirm that valve clearance is within the standard values. If valve clearance is not within standard, reverify step#1 and repeat procedures again. Example: Intake- Valve clearance before adjusting: 0.23mm(.009”) Existing adjusting pad mark: 177 From “Intake Adjusting Pad Selection Matrix”, a suitable adjusting pad would be 185 Exhaust- Valve clearance before adjusting: 0.35mm(.0137”) Existing adjusting pad mark: 177 From “Intake Adjusting Pad Selection Matrix”, a suitable adjusting pad would be 185 3.40 RepairPro Service Manual ENGINE Cylinder Head Assembly 6. CAUTION Place spring retainer on and install valve spring compressor (A). Compress springs only enough to allow split keeper installation and prevent loss of spring tension. Install split keepers with the gap even on both sides. Wear eye protection during assembly. A NOTE: Assemble the valves one at a time to maintain proper order. 1. Install new valve seals on valve guides. 3 7. 8. 2. 3. 4. 5. Apply engine oil to valve guides and seats. Coat valve stem with assembly lube. Install valve carefully with a rotating motion to avoid damaging valve seal. Install spring washers. Dip valve springs and retainer in clean engine oil and install springs with closely spaced coils (B) toward the cylinder head. Repeat procedure for remaining valves. When all valves are installed, tap lightly with soft faced hammer on the end of the valves to seat the keepers. 9. Install the shims and buckets for each valve in the order they were removed. 10. Check valve clearance with engine at Top Dead Center (TDC). NOTE: Repairs such as valve grinding or valve replacement will require re-shimming for proper valve clearance. Use the chart provided on page 3.40 to determine the appropriate shim thickness. Spring Washer Located Below Assembly B Valve Clearance (Engine Cold): Intake: .006″ (.15 mm) Exhaust: .010” (.27 mm) +/- .0019″ (.05 mm) 3.41 ENGINE Cylinder Head Installation CYLINDER SERVICE Clean the gasket surfaces on the cylinder head and cylinder. Remove all traces of old gasket material. Refer to disassembly photos. Cylinder Inspection 1. 2. 2. 3. Install the cam chain tensioner guides. Be sure bottom end of guide is located properly in crankcase. Install the two dowels and a new cylinder head gasket. Place the cylinder head on the cylinder. Apply a film of engine oil to the cylinder head bolt threads and washers, and hand tighten the bolts. 1. Remove all gasket material from the cylinder sealing surfaces. Inspect the top of the cylinder for warp using a straight edge and feeler gauge. The following procedure must be used to torque the cylinder head properly: **TORQUE ALL BOLTS EVENLY IN A CRISS-CROSS PATTERN 1. Torque bolts to 22 ft. lbs. (30 Nm) 2. Torque bolts to 51 ft. lbs. (70 Nm) Cylinder Warp Leave at this torque for 1 minute to allow gaskets to seat for proper sealing. .002″ (.05 mm) 3. Loosen bolts evenly 360o (1 turn) 4. Torque bolts to 29 ft. lbs. (35 Nm) 3. Inspect cylinder for wear, scratches, or damage. 1/2” Down From Top of Cylinder 5. From this point, tighten bolts evenly 90o (1/4 turn) X Y 6. Finally, tighten another 90o (1/4 turn) 7. Install two 6 mm bolts and torque to 6 ft. lbs. (8 Nm) 4. Y X Install the two 6 mm bolts and torque to specification. Y X Cylinder 6 mm Bolt Torque: 1/2” Up From Bottom 6 ft. lbs. (8 Nm) 4. 3.42 Inspect cylinder for taper and out of round with a telescoping gauge or a dial bore gauge. Measure in two different directions, front to back and side to side, on three different levels (1/2” down from top, in the middle, and 1/2” up from bottom). RepairPro Service Manual ENGINE 5. Record measurements. If cylinder is tapered or out of round beyond specification, the cylinder must be replaced. Cylinder Hone Selection and Honing Procedure Cylinder Taper Limit: .002″ (.05 mm) Max. Cylinder Out of Round Limit: .002″ (.05 mm) Max. Standard Bore Size: 3.9055- 3.9062″ (99.20- 99.22 mm) CAUTION A hone which will straighten as well as remove material from the cylinder is very important. Using a common spring loaded glaze breaker for honing is not advised for nicasil cylinders. Polaris recommends using a rigid hone or arbor honing machine. Piston–to–Cylinder Clearance Cylinders may be wet or dry honed depending upon the hone manufacturer’s recommendations. Wet honing removes more material faster and leaves a more distinct pattern in the bore. 1. IMPORTANT: Clean the Cylinder After Honing Measure piston outside diameter at a point 40 mm down from the top of the piston at a right angle to the direction of the piston pin. Piston It is very important that the cylinder be thoroughly cleaned after honing to remove all grit material. Wash the cylinder in a solvent, then in hot, soapy water. Use electrical contact cleaner if necessary to clean these areas. Rinse thoroughly, dry with compressed air, and oil the bore immediately with Polaris 4 Cycle Lubricant to prevent the formation of surface rust. Honing To Deglaze 2. Piston Pin Subtract this measurement from the maximum cylinder measurement obtained previously in Step 5. Piston to Cylinder Clearance: Std: .0018- .0025″ (.046- .065 mm) Piston O.D.: Std: 3.9037- 3.9040″ (99.155- 99.170 mm) A finished cylinder should have a cross–hatch pattern to ensure piston ring seating and to aid in the retention of the fuel/oil mixture during initial break in. Hone cylinder according to hone manufacturer’s instructions, or these guidelines: • Use a motor speed of approximately 300–500 RPM, run the hone in and out of the cylinder rapidly until cutting tension decreases. Remember to keep the hone drive shaft centered (or cylinder centered on arbor) and to bring the stones approximately 1/2” (1.3 cm) above and below the bore at the end of each stroke. • Release the hone at regular intervals and inspect the bore to determine if it has been sufficiently deglazed, and to check for correct cross-hatch. NOTE: Do not allow cylinder to heat up during honing. • After honing has been completed, inspect cylinder for thinning or peeling. 3.43 3 ENGINE If cylinder wear or damage is excessive, it will be necessary to replace the cylinder. Hone only enough to deglaze the outer layer of the cylinder bore. 3. If the bottom installed gap measurement exceeds the service limit, replace the rings. If ring gap is below specified limit, file ring ends until the gap is within the specified range. NOTE: Always check piston ring installed gap after re–boring a cylinder or when installing new rings. A re–bored cylinder should always be scrubbed thoroughly with hot soapy water, rinsed, and dried completely. Wipe cylinder bore with oil immediately to prevent rust. WATER PUMP SERVICE Oil Seal / Mechanical Seal Removal (Engine Disassembled) Piston Ring Installed Gap 1. Place each piston ring inside cylinder using piston to push ring squarely into place. NOTE: The water pump mechanical seal can be removed without removing the engine. Refer to Water Pump Mechanical Seal Installation. Replace the water pump mechanical seal whenever the crankcase is disassembled. Feeler Gauge Cylinder 25-50 mm Piston Ring Piston Ring Installed Gap Top Ring Std: .008- .012″ (.20- .30 mm) Limit: .027” (.7 mm) Second Ring Std: .014- .019″ (.35- .50 mm) Limit: .031” (.8 mm) Oil Ring Std: .004- .019″ (.10- .50 mm) Limit: .039” (1.0 mm) Measure installed gap with a feeler gauge at both the top and bottom of the cylinder. NOTE: A difference in end gap indicates cylinder taper. The cylinder should be measured for excessive taper and out of round. 1. Remove the pump shaft bearings from the PTO (right hand) side crankcase. 2. Drive the water pump mechanical seal out of the crankcase from inside to outside. NOTE: The new mechanical seal must be installed using special tools. See Mechanical Seal Installation. Water Pump Mechanical Seal Installation 1. 2. 2. 3.44 3. 4. 5. Clean the seal cavity to remove all traces of old sealer. Place a new mechanical seal in the seal drive collar, and install on the pump shaft. Screw the guide onto the end of the pump shaft. Install the washer and nut and tighten to draw seal into place until fully seated. Remove the guide adaptor using the additional nut as a jam nut if necessary. RepairPro Service Manual ENGINE Mechanical Seal Removal and Installation (Engine Assembled) 2. The Water Pump Mechanical Seal Puller allows a technician to replace the seal on ES50PL engines without removing the engine and splitting the cases. Slide the main puller body over the outer portion of the mechanical seal as shown in (Figure 3-45)and turn T– Handle clockwise until it contacts water pump shaft. Continue rotating until outer portion of mechanical seal is separated from the metal seal body. NOTE: This removal process dismantles the seal, making it unusable for reinstallation. Water Pump Mechanical Seal Puller: (PN 2872105) 3 Replacement T-Handle: (PN 2872106) CAUTION 3. Improper or careless use of this tool or procedure can result in a bent water pump shaft.Pump shaft replacement requires engine removal and crankcase separation. Use caution while performing this procedure. Make sure the puller is parallel to the shaft at all times. Do not place side loads on the water pump shaft or strike the puller or shaft in any way. 1. Figure 3-45 III 2 Insert the puller legs between the water pump drive shaft and the remaining portion of the mechanical seal. Attach the puller legs to the main puller body. (Figure 3-46) Main Puller Body Position the split 90° to opening on main puller body Seal After the coolant has been drained, remove the water pump cover, impeller and the sealing washer. Mechanical Seal Figure 3-46 Sealing Washer 4. Impeller 5. Ensure that the split between the puller legs are fully supported by the main body of the tool (Figure 3-46). Tighten the hex socket screws on the puller legs sufficiently so the lip of the puller legs will grasp the mechanical seal (Figure 3-47). Hex Socket Screws Puller Legs Lip must grasp inside of mechanical seal. Figure 3-47 3.45 ENGINE 6. Turn the puller T–Handle clockwise until it contacts the water pump shaft. Continue rotating until the remaining portion of mechanical seal has been removed from the case. (Figure 3-48) TROUBLESHOOTING Engine Engine Turns Over But Fails to Start • No fuel • Dirt in fuel line or filter • Fuel will not pass through fuel valve • Fuel pump inoperative/restricted • Tank vent plugged • Carb starter circuit Figure 3-48 7. Water Pump Install Kit (PN 5131135) is required to install the new mechanical seal. This tool is available separately as well as included in Crankshaft / Water Pump Seal Installation Kit (PN 2871283). • Engine flooded • Low compression (high cylinder leakage) • No spark (Spark plug fouled) Engine Does Not Turn Over • Dead battery • Starter motor does not turn • Engine seized, rusted, or mechanical failure Engine Runs But Will Not Idle • Restricted carburetor pilot system • Carburetor misadjusted • Choke not adjusted properly • Low compression • Crankcase breather restricted 3.46 RepairPro Service Manual ENGINE Engine Idles But Will Not Rev Up Low Compression • Spark plug fouled/weak spark • Decompressor stuck • Broken throttle cable • Cylinder head gasket leak • Obstruction in air intake • No valve clearance or incorrectly adjusted • Air box removed (reinstall all intake components) • Cylinder or piston worn • Incorrect or restricted carburetor jetting • Piston rings worn, leaking, broken, or sticking • ETC switch limiting speed • Bent valve or stuck valve • Reverse speed limiter limiting speed • Valve spring broken or weak • Carburetor vacuum slide sticking/diaphragm damaged • Valve not seating properly (bent or carbon accumulated on sealing surface) 3 • Incorrect ignition timing • Rocker arm sticking • Restricted exhaust system Backfiring Engine Has Low Power • ETC or speed limiter system malfunction • Spark plug fouled • Fouled spark plug or incorrect plug or plug gap • Cylinder, piston, ring, or valve wear or damage (check compression) • Carburetion faulty – lean condition • PVT not operating properly • Exhaust system air leaks • Restricted exhaust muffler • Ignition system faulty: Spark plug cap cracked / broken Ignition coil faulty Ignition or kill switch circuit faulty Ignition timing incorrect Sheared flywheel key • Carburetor vacuum slide sticking/diaphragm damaged • Dirty carburetor Piston Failure – Scoring • Lack of lubrication • Dirt entering engine through cracks in air filter or ducts • Engine oil dirty or contaminated Excessive Smoke and Carbon Buildup • Excessive piston–to–cylinder clearance • Poor connections in ignition system • System wiring wet • Valve sticking • Air leaks in intake • Lean condition • Wet sumping • Worn rings, piston, or cylinder • Worn valve guides or seals • Restricted breather • Air filter dirty or contaminated 3.47 ENGINE Spark Plug Fouling • Spark plug cap loose or faulty • Choke cable adjustment or plunger/cable sticking • Foreign material on choke plunger seat or plunger • Incorrect spark plug heat range or gap • Carburetor inlet needle and seat worn • Jet needle and/or needle jet worn or improperly adjusted • Restricted system (mud or debris in radiator fins or restriction to air flow, passages blocked in radiator, lines, pump, or water jacket) • Lean mixture (restricted jets, vents, fuel pump or fuel valve) • Fuel pump output weak • Restricted radiator (internally or cooling fins) • Water pump failure • Cooling system restriction • Excessive carburetor vibration (loose or missing needle jet locating pins) • Cooling fan inoperative or turning too slowly (perform current draw test) • Loose jets in carburetor or calibration incorrect for altitude/temperature • Ignition timing misadjusted • Low oil level • Incorrect float level setting • Spark plug incorrect heat range • PVT system calibrated incorrectly or components worn or adjusted incorrectly • Faulty hot light circuit • Fuel quality poor (old) or octane too high • Thermostat stuck closed or not opening completely • Low compression • Restricted exhaust • Weak ignition (loose coil ground, faulty coil, stator, or ETC switch) • ETC switch adjusted incorrectly • Restricted air filter (main or pre–cleaner) or breather system Temperature Too Low • Thermostat stuck open Leak at Water Pump Weep Hole • Faulty water pump mechanical seal (coolant leak) • Faulty pump shaft oil seal (oil leak) • Improperly assembled air intake system • Restricted engine breather system • Oil contaminated with fuel • Restricted oil tank vent Cooling System Overheating • Low coolant level • Air in cooling system • Wrong type of coolant • Faulty pressure cap or system leaks 3.48 RepairPro Service Manual FUEL SYSTEM / CARBURETION CHAPTER 4 FUEL SYSTEM / CARBURETION FUEL SYSTEM AND CARBURETION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 BSR 42 CARBURETOR EXPLODED VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 FUEL TANK ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 JETTING GUIDELINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 CARBURETOR JETTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 MIKUNI JET PART NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 CV CARBURETOR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 CARBURETOR FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 VENT SYSTEMS – CV CARBURETOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 MIKUNI CV CARBURETOR OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 PILOT (IDLE AND SLOW) SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 STARTER SYSTEM (CHOKE OR ENRICHMENT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 FLOAT SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 MAIN SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 PILOT SCREW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 CARBURETOR DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9 CARBURETOR CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10 CARBURETOR INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10 CARBURETOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11 FLOAT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11 4 FUEL DELIVERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12 NEEDLE AND SEAT LEAK TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12 FUEL LEVEL TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12 FUEL PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13 FUEL PUMP DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13 FUEL PUMP INSPECTION / ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13 TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13 FUEL STARVATION / LEAN MIXTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13 RICH MIXTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14 POOR IDLE / IDLE TOO HIGH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14 IDLE TOO LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14 ERRATIC IDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14 4.1 FUEL SYSTEM / CARBURETION FUEL SYSTEM AND CARBURETION BSR 42 Carburetor Exploded View Ref 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Description Ref Cover, Diaphragm Spring Diaphragm Valve, Piston Holder Spring Washer Washer Jet, Needle O-ring Case Spring Seal Ring Valve, Throttle (105) 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Description Guide, Cable O-ring Cover Screw A-Shaft, Throttle Screw Bolt Spring, Idle Adjust O-ring Screw, Adjust Pin, Float O-ring Body, Float Screw Screw Ref Description Ref 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 A-Float Jet, Main Ring Holder, Jet Jet, Needle O-ring Needle Guide Screw Screw Jet, Pilot Jet, Starter (42.5) Asm., Carburetor Packing E-ring Cap 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 Description Asm., Plunger Spring Holder, Guide Screw Cover Spring Asm., Diaphragm Filter Jet, Pilot Air 2 (1.3) Jet, Pilot Air 1 (110) Jet, Main Air (120) Ring E-ring O-ring Screw 3 60 53 1 50 54 55 4 52 56 5 49 51 59 2 6 58 7 48 47 8 1 3 5 46 57 45 9 2 44 11 4 43 10 42 13 41 40 12 39 13 14 Jet Needle “E” Clip Position 38 37 15 16 23 17 22 18 21 36 35 34 27 24 28 33 25 20 30 32 26 31 29 19 Refer to Page 4.4 for Optional Jet Part Numbers 4.2 RepairPro Service Manual FUEL SYSTEM / CARBURETION Fuel Tank Assembly Tank Cap Vent Line Fuel Tank Fuel Valve 4 Fuel Lines Impulse Line Fuel Pump In-Line Filter FUEL FLOW Fuel Tank Vent Fuel Tank Fuel Screens Fuel Valve *Fuel Pump (Filter in Pickup) Carburetor Vent In-Line Filter Carburetor Engine * Located on upper frame 4.3 FUEL SYSTEM / CARBURETION Special Tools PART NUMBER TOOL DESCRIPTION 2870975 Mity VacTM Pressure Test Tool 2872314 Carburetor Float Adjustment Tool Polaris ATV carburetors are calibrated for an altitude of 0–6000 ft. (0–1800 meters) and ambient temperatures above +40o F (+26o C). Carburetors must be re–calibrated if operated outside this temperature and/or altitude range. The jetting installed in production is not intended for all altitudes and/or temperatures. In addition, air screw / pilot screw adjustments may be required to suit operating conditions. Carburetor Jetting CAUTION WARNING A main jet that is too small will cause a lean operating condition resulting in serious engine damage. Select the correct main jet carefully for elevation and temperature according to the charts in the specifications section or in the Owner’s Manual for each particular model. Gasoline is extremely flammable and explosive under certain conditions. Always stop the engine and refuel outdoors or in a well ventilated area. Do not overfill the tank. The tank is at full capacity when the fuel reaches the bottom of the filler neck. Leave room for expansion of fuel. Never start the engine or let it run in an enclosed area. Gasoline powered engine exhaust fumes are poisonous and can cause loss of consciousness and death in a short time. Never drain the float bowl when the engine is hot. Severe burns may result. Do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks in or near the area where refueling is performed or where gasoline is stored. If you get gasoline in your eyes or if you should swallow gasoline, seek medical attention immediately. If you spill gasoline on your skin or clothing, immediately wash with soap and water and change clothing. Jetting Guidelines Changes in altitude and temperature affect air density, which is essentially the amount of oxygen available for combustion. In low elevations and cold temperatures, the air is more dense and has more oxygen. In higher elevations and higher temperatures, the air is less dense with reduced oxygen. 4.4 IMPORTANT: The following guidelines must be followed when establishing a main jet setting: 1. Select the lowest anticipated temperature at which the machine will be operated. 2. Determine the lowest approximate altitude at which the machine will be operated. 3. Select the correct main jet from the specifications chart in Chapter 1. Mikuni Jet Part Numbers Main Jets Jet Number Part Number 130 3131537 132.5 3131536 135 3131535 137.5 3131534 140 3131522 142.5 3131523 145 3131524 147.5 3131525 152.5 3131526 155 3131527 157.5 3131528 160 3131529 162.5 3131530 165 3131531 167.5 3131532 170 3131533 Pilot Jets Jet Number Part Number 25 3131538 27.5 3131539 30 3131540 32.5 3131541 35 3131542 37.5 3131543 40 3131544 42.5 3131545 47.5 3131546 50 3131547 52.5 3131548 55 3131549 57.5 3131550 60 3131551 65 3131552 70 3131553 RepairPro Service Manual FUEL SYSTEM / CARBURETION CV CARBURETOR SYSTEM Vent Systems – CV Carburetor Carburetor Function The carburetor float bowl vent lines supply atmospheric pressure to the float bowl. The lines must be free of kinks, restrictions and be properly routed. This allows fuel to flow in the proper amount and prevents contaminants from entering the carburetor. Carburetor Component Function System Main Components Main Function Main Affect Mikuni CV Carburetor Operation Maintains specified Inlet Pipe, Needle fuel level in float All systems; all Float System chamber and Seat, Float, throttle ranges (Level Control) (carburetor float Float Pin bowl). Venting Starter (Choke / Enrichment) Passages in carburetor; vent lines to frame. Supplies All systems; all atmospheric pressure to float throttle ranges. chamber. All throttle Choke Lever, Cable, ranges. Plunger, Return Supplies additional fuel air mixture Greatest effect Spring, Carb Passages (Starter necessary for cold at low throttle settings and starting. Jet, Starter Bleed idle. Pipe). The constant velocity carburetor incorporates a mechanically operated throttle plate and a vacuum controlled slide valve (vacuum slide). The venturi cross–sectional area in the carburetor bore is increased or decreased automatically by the vacuum slide, which moves according to the amount of negative pressure (less than atmospheric) present in the venturi. A diaphragm attached to the top of the vacuum slide is sealed to the slide and to the carburetor body forming two chambers. The chamber above the diaphragm is connected to the venturi area by a drilled orifice in the center of the vacuum slide. The chamber below the diaphragm is vented to atmospheric pressure by a passage on the air box side of the carburetor. A spring, installed in the center of the vacuum slide, dampens the slide movement and assists the return of the slide. Diaphragm Low Pressure From Venturi Atmospheric Pressure Pilot Jet / Passageways, Pilot–Mixture Mainly idle to Screw with Spring Washer and Sealing Primarily supplies 1/4 throttle. Pilot O–Ring, By-pass fuel at idle and low Minimal effect (Idle System) after 1/2 throttle positions. Ports (Behind throttle. Throttle Plate), Pilot Air Jet, Pilot Outlet, Throttle Plate. Atmospheric Air inlet Vacuum Slide Throttle Plate Main Jet, Main Air Jet, Main Air Supplies fuel at Passage, Needle mid–range and high Main System Jet, Jet Needle, throttle settings. Vacuum Slide, Throttle Plate. Venturi 1/4 to full throttle. = Air Flow = Low pressure 4.5 4 FUEL SYSTEM / CARBURETION Mikuni CV Carburetor Operation, Continued..... When the throttle plate is opened and engine speed begins to increase, the pressure in the venturi, and therefore in the chamber above the diaphragm, becomes significantly lower than atmospheric. Atmospheric pressure in the chamber below the diaphragm forces the diaphragm upward, raising the slide against spring pressure. When the pressure above and below the diaphragm are nearly equal, the slide moves downward under spring pressure. Raising or lowering the slide increases or decreases the cross sectional area in the venturi, and therefore the air velocity in the venturi is kept relatively constant. This provides improved fuel atomization and optimum fuel/air ratio. Pilot (Idle and Slow) System This system supplies fuel during engine operation with throttle valve closed (1) or slightly opened. The fuel from float chamber (2) is metered by pilot jet (3) where it mixes with air coming in through pilot air jet (4). The mixture then goes up through pilot passage to pilot screw (5). A part of the mixture is discharged into the main bore out of bypass ports (6). The remainder is then metered by pilot screw and discharged into the main bore through pilot outlet (7). 4 1 6 7 5 2 3 Note: Diagrams are for explanation of theory only, and are not true representations of Mikini BST carburetor. 4.6 RepairPro Service Manual FUEL SYSTEM / CARBURETION Starter System (Choke or Enrichment) Float System When the choke cable (1) is activated, the starter plunger (5) is lifted off the seat. 8 1 5 Fuel enters the float chamber (3) by means of the inlet pipe and passage, through a screen on the back of the inlet needle seat (4), and around the inlet needle (2). As the fuel fills the float chamber, the float (1) rises and forces the inlet needle against the seat, shutting off the orifice in the seat. When fuel level is up in float chamber, floats are up and needle valve remains pushed up against valve seat. Under this condition, no fuel enters the float chamber. As the fuel level falls, floats go down and needle valve unseats itself to allow fuel into the chamber. In this manner, the needle valve releases and shuts off fuel alternately to maintain a constant fuel level inside the float chamber. 6 7 4 2 4 3 Fuel is drawn into the starter circuit from the float chamber (2) through the starter jet (3). Starter jet meters this fuel, which then flows into starter pipe (4) and mixes with the air (7) coming from the float chamber. The mixture, rich in fuel content, reaches starter plunger and mixes again with the air coming through a passage (8) extending from underneath the diaphragm. The rich fuel/air mixture for starting is discharged through starter outlet (6) in the main bore. Inlet Pipe 3 1 4 2 4.7 FUEL SYSTEM / CARBURETION Main System Pilot Screw As throttle valve (1) is opened, engine speed rises, and this increases negative pressure in the venturi. Consequently the vacuum slide (2) moves upward. The fuel in float chamber (3) is metered by main jet (4), and the metered fuel enters needle jet (5), in which it mixes with the air admitted through main air jet (6) to form an emulsion. The emulsified fuel then passes through the clearance between needle jet (5) and jet needle (7), and is discharged into the venturi (A). Mixture proportioning is accomplished in needle jet (5); the clearance through which the emulsified fuel must flow is determined ultimately by throttle position and vacuum slide height. The pilot system supplies fuel during engine operation with the throttle valve closed or slightly opened. The fuel/air mixture is metered by pilot screw and discharged into the main bore through the pilot outlet. 1 CAUTION The pilot screw is calibrated at the factory to meet EPA / CARB regulations for air quality standards and is sealed with a brass plug to prevent tampering. Removal of the tamper proof plug is not permitted. For service purposes, cleaning of the pilot circuit can be done only by a certified repair shop to ensure air quality standards are not exceeded. 2 7 Pilot Screw Location A 6 Brass Plug Installed 3 5 4 Brass Plug Removed 4.8 RepairPro Service Manual FUEL SYSTEM / CARBURETION Carburetor Disassembly 3. Use the following disassembly, assembly, and inspection techniques to service a CV carburetor. 1. Remove inlet needle seat retaining screw along with plate, and carefully remove needle seat. NOTE: Do not use a pliers to remove the seat or permanent damage may occur. Remove carburetor diaphragm chamber cover with a ratchet style screwdriver. DO NOT use an impact driver to remove the screws or carburetor may be permanently damaged. 4 Remove Screw 4. 2. Remove the pilot mixture screw, spring, flat washer, and O– Ring. If an anti–tamper plug is installed over the pilot screw cavity, it must be removed for access. Remove float bowl. Remove the float pin screw. Then the float and float pin can be removed. O-Ring Washer Spring Pilot Screw Float Pin Remove Screw NOTE: The starter jet is removable. Upon disassembly, place the parts in a container for safe keeping. Starter Jet Pilot Screw 4.9 FUEL SYSTEM / CARBURETION Carburetor Cleaning WARNING Carburetor Inspection 1. Protect eyes from contact with cleaner. Take appropriate safety measures during these procedures. Safety glasses and chemical resistant gloves are required. Should you get cleaner in your eyes or if you swallow cleaner, seek medical attention immediately. Carburetor cleaners can be extremely caustic. Extended periods of soaking can loosen the adhesive sealer on the passage drill–way plugs. Do not soak rubber or plastic components (such as the vacuum slide diaphragm, needle seat screen, or O–Rings in caustic cleaning solutions. Irreparable damage may occur. Do not use agitator-type carburetor cleaning equipment. Rubber parts must be cleaned with mild detergent and hot water only. Jet Needle 1. Thoroughly clean the carburetor body, jets, and all passages with carburetor cleaner or electrical contact cleaner. 2. If the carburetor is extremely dirty or contaminated with fuel residue and varnish, soak for short periods only in carburetor cleaner, and rinse in hot water. 3. Replace the jets if they have a buildup of fuel residue or bacterial growth that cannot be removed. Even a small amount of residue will reduce the flow characteristics of the jet. 4. Inspect jet needle and needle jet for wear. Look for discoloration, shiny spots, or an area that looks different than the rest of the needle. The middle to upper portion of the needle contacts the needle jet and is the most likely wear point. If jet needle shows signs of wear replace both the needle and needle jet to prevent a rich condition. TIP: A worn needle jet is difficult to spot. To check, slide a slightly larger new jet needle into the needle jet and hold it to a light source. Light will be visible between the needle and needle jet if it is worn. Needle Jet Inspect this area 2. Inspect the inlet needle tapered surface for any sign of wear or damage. Be sure the spring loaded pin is free moving and returns freely when pushed. The inlet needle and seat should be pressure tested after assembly. Good Condition Worn, Deposits Verify all passages and jets are unobstructed by spraying electrical contact cleaner through the passages. IMPORTANT: Do not use wire or welding tip cleaners as the orifice size may be altered. Seat Wear areas 5. Use low pressure air to dry carburetor body and all components. Needle 4.10 RepairPro Service Manual FUEL SYSTEM / CARBURETION Carburetor Assembly Inspect the diaphragm (A) for holes, deterioration, or damage. Make sure the diaphragm is pliable but not swollen. The diaphragm should fit properly in the carburetor body. Replace diaphragm assembly if diaphragm is damaged. NOTE: The final pilot (idle) mixture must be adjusted with the engine running. Refer to Chapter 2 for procedure. Pilot Screw Base Setting (Set at Factory) Factory Specification: 2.5 Turns Out A Float Height Adjustment 1. Place the throttle side of the carburetor on a level surface to remove weight from float arm. In this position, the float tongue will rest slightly outward. Float Outward E B C D Carburetor Level 1. Replace parts in proper order. The spring seat (B) is stepped and must be placed on TOP of “E” Clip (C). Spacer washer (D) must be installed below the E–Clip. Refer to parts manual for more information. 2. Be sure the tab (E) on outer edge of diaphragm is positioned properly in the carburetor body. 2. With the carburetor still resting on the level surface, use one hand to slightly tilt the carburetor back. The float will then fall into the correct position, with the float tongue resting lightly on the inlet needle valve pin without compressing the spring. The bottom of the float should be parallel with the float bowl mating surface. 13-14 mm Float parallel with float bowl mating surface 3. Install the pilot mixture screw, spring, washer, and O–ring as an assembly. Lubricate the O–Ring with oil or light grease before installation. IMPORTANT: Do not damage the O–ring during installation. Turn the screw in until it lightly contacts the seat. Then back it out the specified number of turns. 4.11 4 FUEL SYSTEM / CARBURETION 3. If the float is past parallel with the mating surface, the carburetor has been tilted back too far and the float tongue is likely compressing the needle valve pin. Float too far inward 4. FUEL DELIVERY Needle and Seat Leak Test 1. Install the float bowl. Invert the carburetor and install a Mity–Vac™ (PN 2870975) to the fuel inlet fitting. Apply 5 PSI pressure to inlet fitting. The needle and seat should hold pressure indefinitely. If not, inspect needle and seat and seat O–ring. Measure the height from the float bowl mating surface to the top of step of the float as shown in Illustration 2. Both sides of float should be parallel to each other. The measurement should be made at the mid–point on top of the float using Float Adjustment Tool (PN 2872314) or a vernier caliper. When measuring the height, be sure the inlet needle valve spring is not compressed. Mity VacTM (PN 2870975) Float Bowl Height: 13-14 mm 5. If adjustment is necessary, bend the tongue slightly. Be sure float measurement is even on left and right side. Bend to adjust Fuel Level test A fuel level test can be performed on some models if the drain hose fitting is accessible. Be sure to re–attach the bowl drain hose after performing the test. A fuel level test allows you to observe the height of the fuel in the float bowl without removing the carburetor. The fuel level can be observed with the engine either running or shut off, however, engine must run briefly to allow fuel level to stabilize. 1. Attach a clear line to drain fitting. Be sure line fits tightly on fitting. Position hose along side of carburetor as shown. Float arms even 1.5 mm .060 in. Bowl Mating Surface 4.12 RepairPro Service Manual FUEL SYSTEM / CARBURETION 2. Open bowl drain screw by turning counterclockwise approximately two turns. Start and run engine for 3 to 5 seconds to allow fuel level to stabilize in the line. If level is out of specification, remove carburetor and inspect inlet needle and seat, float height, passages, etc. NOTE: If a line was removed to perform this procedure, it must be replaced. Fuel Pump Inspection / Assembly 1. Inspect inlet and outlet check valves for cracks, warpage or damage. Inspect the diaphragms for cracks, holes or swelling. 2. To clean the valves or pump body, remove the set screw and washer. Remove the valve and wash with soap and water. Carburetor cleaner may be used to clean the pump body when the check valves are removed. Fuel Pump This 500cc is equipped with a pressure regulated fuel pump (1–3 PSI). The pump is located in the front fender cavity of the machine. IMPORTANT: Some carburetor cleaners are very caustic and should not be used to clean the non– metal parts of the fuel pump. 3. To test the fuel pump: Check the sealing surfaces of the pump body and covers. Carefully remove all traces of old gasket and check the surfaces for damage. Replace diaphragms and gaskets as a set. 1. Turn fuel off. 2. Remove the front cab to access the fuel pump if needed. 3. Disconnect impulse line from pump. 4. Reassemble the pump in the reverse order of disassembly. Tighten all screws evenly. 4. Connect Mity–Vac™ (PN 2870975) to the impulse line fitting on the pump. TROUBLESHOOTING 5. Apply 5 inches (Hg) vacuum to the pump fitting. The diaphragm should hold vacuum indefinitely. If fuel is present in the impulse line or vacuum chamber of the pump, the diaphragm is ruptured. The pump diaphragms must be replaced. Fuel Pump Fuel Starvation / Lean Mixture Symptoms: Hard start or no start, bog, backfire, popping through intake / exhaust, hesitation, detonation, low power, spark plug erosion, engine runs hot, surging, high idle, idle speed erratic. • No fuel in tank • Restricted tank vent, or routed improperly • Fuel lines or fuel valve restricted • Fuel filter plugged • Carburetor vent line(s) restricted Impulse Line • Plugged or restricted inlet needle and seat screen or inlet passage • Clogged jets or passages Fuel Pump Disassembly 1. 2. Remove the screws from the pump diaphragm cover. Note the location of the two longer screws. Remove the diaphragm cover gasket, diaphragm, and valve body gasket. 3. Remove the outlet check valve cover, diaphragm, and gasket. • Float stuck, holding inlet needle closed or inlet needle stuck • Float level too low • Fuel pump inoperative • Air leak at impulse line • Restricted impulse line (kinked, pinched) • Intake air leak (throttle shaft, intake ducts, airbox or air cleaner cover) 4.13 4 FUEL SYSTEM / CARBURETION • Ruptured vacuum slide diaphragm, vacuum slide stuck closed or sticky Idle Too Low • Choke cable bending or incorrectly adjusted • Improper spring • Idle speed set incorrectly • Jet needle position incorrect • Idle mixture screw adjusted incorrectly or damaged • Incorrect pilot screw adjustment • Belt dragging Rich Mixture • Ignition timing incorrect • Worn jet needle/needle jet Symptoms: Fouls spark plugs, black, sooty exhaust smoke, rough idle, poor fuel economy, engine runs rough/ misses, poor performance, bog, engine loads up, backfire. • Plugged or restricted idle jet Erratic Idle • Air intake restricted (inspect intake duct) • Choke cable bending or incorrectly adjusted • Air filter dirty/plugged • Throttle cable incorrectly adjusted • Choke plunger sticking, incorrectly adjusted choke • Air leaks, dirty carburetor passages (pilot circuit) • Choke cable binding or improperly routed • Pilot mixture screw damaged or adjusted incorrectly • Incorrect pilot air/fuel screw adjustment • Tight valves • Faulty inlet needle and seat • Ignition timing incorrect • Faulty inlet needle seat O–Ring • Belt dragging • Float level too high • Dirty air cleaner • Poor fuel quality (old fuel) • Engine worn • Loose jets • Spark plug fouled • Worn jet needle/needle jet or other carburetor parts • Idle speed set incorrectly (speed limiter) • Dirty carburetor (air bleed passages or jets) • Worn jet needle/needle jet • Weak or damaged vacuum piston return spring • Plugged or restricted idle jet • Fouled spark plug Poor Idle / Idle Too High • Idle adjusted improperly / idle mixture screw damaged • Sticky vacuum slide • Throttle cable sticking, improperly adjusted, routed incorrectly • Choke cable sticking, improperly adjusted, routed incorrectly • Plugged or restricted idle jet 4.14 RepairPro Service Manual BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION CHAPTER 5 BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 BODY ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 BODY COMPONENT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 SEAT / SIDE PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 FRONT CAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 TANK COVER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 HEEL POCKET. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 REAR CAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 STEERING ASSEMBLY EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 STEERING KNUCKLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 BALL JOINT SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 5 FRONT HUB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10 EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10 HUB REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11 HUB DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12 HUB ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12 HUB INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13 FRONT SUSPENSION EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.14 FRONT A-ARM REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15 A-ARM REMOVAL AND INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15 A-ARM INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15 REAR SUSPENSION EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.16 REAR A-ARM REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17 A-ARM REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17 A-ARM INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17 A-ARM INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18 REAR HOUSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.19 EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.19 HOUSING REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.20 HOUSING DISASSEMBLY / SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.21 ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.23 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.24 REAR BEARING CARRIER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25 CARRIER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25 CARRIER DISASSEMBLY / INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25 CARRIER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.26 CARRIER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.27 REAR DRIVE (CV) JOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.28 CV JOINT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.28 CV JOINT SERVICE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.28 CV BOOT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.29 CV JOINT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.30 DECALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.31 REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.31 5.1 BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION FRONT SHOCK EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.32 RYDE FX™ FRONT SHOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.32 REAR SHOCK EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.33 RYDE FX™ REAR SHOCK (COMPRESSION ADJUSTABLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.33 RYDE FX™ SHOCK SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.34 SHOCK SPECIFICATION CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.34 PISTON ORIENTATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.34 RYDE FX™ SHOCK REBUILD PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.35 5.2 RepairPro Service Manual BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION GENERAL INFORMATION COMPONENT Torque Specifications COMPONENT SERVICEABLE COMPONENTS TORQUE VALUE FRONT SUSPENSION Front A–Arm Attaching Bolts Front A–Arm Ball Joint Stud Nut Front Spindle Nut Tie Rod End Jam Nut Tie Rod End Attaching Nut Shock Bolts (top & bottom) 33 ft. lbs. (45 Nm) 40 ft. lbs. (54 Nm) 40 ft. lbs. (54 Nm) 15 ft. lbs. (20 Nm) 33 ft. lbs. (45 Nm) 33 ft. lbs. (45 Nm) STEERING Master Cylinder Mount Bolts Handlebar Adjuster Block Steering Post Nut Steering Post Bushing Nuts Steering Post Retainer Nuts Centerlink - Steering Post Arm Centerlink - Idler Arm TORQUE VALUE Rear Pivot Housing Mounting Bolts Rear Sprocket Bolts Brake Disc Caliper Mounting Bolts Wheel Nuts Rear Pivot Housing Mount Plate Foot Peg Special Tools PART NUMBER PA - 48282 45–55 in. lbs. (5.2–6.3 Nm) 9 ft. lbs. (12 Nm) 35 ft.lbs. (47 Nm) 17 ft. lbs. (23 Nm) 17 ft. lbs. (23 Nm) 33 ft. lbs. (45 Nm) 33 ft. lbs. (45 Nm) 30 ft. lbs. (41 Nm) 26 ft. lbs. (35 Nm) 18 ft. lbs. (25 Nm) 25 ft. lbs. (34 Nm) 17 ft. lbs. (23 Nm) 33 ft. lbs. (45 Nm) 2870871 5 TOOL DESCRIPTION Rear Drive Hub Removal / Installation Tool Ball Joint Replacement Tool PS-45259 Gas Fill Tool PS-45261 IFP Positioning / Extraction Tool PA-48282 Rear Hub Tool REAR SUSPENSION Rear A–Arm Attaching Bolts Rear Hub Nut Rear Hub Carrier Bolts Upper Torsion Bar Bolts Shock Bolts (top & bottom) Torsion Bar Pivot Plate Bolts 33 ft. lbs. (45 Nm) 90 ft. lbs. (122 Nm) 30 ft. lbs. (41 Nm) 33 ft. lbs. (45 Nm) 33 ft. lbs. (45 Nm) 9 ft. lbs. (12 Nm) 5.3 BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION BODY ASSEMBLY Exploded View A. Seat B. Seat Release Latch C. Rear Cab D. Side Panel E. Front Cover F. Front Cab G. Heel Pocket H. Heel Support A O O B I. Grab Bar J. Fuel Tank Cover K. Frame L. Foot Peg M. Rock Guard N. Front Bumper O. Rear Cab Support C O H D I J G L K D F M E N L M 5.4 RepairPro Service Manual BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION BODY COMPONENT REMOVAL 2. Remove the 2 torx head screws holding the lower front portion of the front cab. 3. Disconnect the 16 pin connector to completely remove the front cab assembly. Seat / Side Panel 1. Remove the seat by lifting up on the releasing latch and slide the seat towards the rear of the ATV. 2. Remove the 2 torx head screws from the side panel. 3. 4. 5 Carefully unhook the locking tabs at the rear portion of the side panel and then slide the panel towards the rear of the ATV to completely disengage the side panel locking tabs Reverse the removal steps to reinstall the side panel. Front Cab 1. Remove the 4 torx head screws and the 2 (6mm) bolts holding the rear portion of the front cab. 4. Reverse the removal steps to reinstall the front cab. Tank Cover 1. Remove the 4 (6mm) bolts (A) retaining the fuel tank cover. A A 5.5 BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION 2. 3. Remove the fuel tank cap to allow the cover to be removed. Once removed reinstall the fuel tank cap. 1. Remove the 2 bolts from the lower portion of the rear cab on each side as shown below. 2. Push both seat grommets (C) through the rear cab, remove screws (D) and completely remove the rear cab. Reverse the removal steps to reinstall the tank cover. Heel Pocket 1. Rear Cab Remove the 2 bolts from the upper portion of the heel pocket. C D 3. 2. Remove the 3 screws (A) from the lower portion and remove the heel pocket. Reverse the removal steps to reinstall the rear cab. It may be necessary to lubricate the rubber grommets to aid the reassembly. A 3. Reverse the removal steps to reinstall the heel pocket. 5.6 RepairPro Service Manual BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION STEERING ASSEMBLY EXPLODED VIEW 9 ft. lbs (12 Nm) A. Handlebar B. Block Clamps C. Steering Bushings D. Steering Post E. Zerk Fitting F. Cotter Pin G. Tie Rod Assembly H. Sealed Ball Bearing I. Ball Bearings J. Foam Spacer K. Tube Spacer L. Steering Knuckle M. Centerlink Asm. N. Steering Idler Asm. A B D 33 ft. lbs. (45 Nm) C E 5 L 17 ft. lbs. (23 Nm) G M 33 ft. lbs. (45 Nm) 17 ft. lbs. (23 Nm) F 15 ft. lbs. (20 Nm) 33 ft. lbs. (45 Nm) J N K I H NOTE: APPLY ANTI-SEIZE COMPOUND ONTO SPINDLE BEFORE HUB INSTALLATION 35 ft. lbs. (47 Nm) 5.7 BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION STEERING KNUCKLE Removal 1. 2. Follow the steps in the “FRONT HUB REMOVAL” section to remove the hub, if needed. Remove the upper and lower ball joint cotter keys and castle nuts. 4. Tap down on the lower A-arm to move the lower ball joint from the steering hub. Installation 1. 2. 3. 4. Before installation check the condition of the ball joints. Joints should move freely and have no axial play. Place the upper and lower A-arms into the steering hub. Install the castle nuts onto the upper and lower A-arms. Torque the nuts to 35 ft.lbs. (47 Nm). Install new cotter pins into the castle nuts and ball joints. BALL JOINT SERVICE Removal 1. The A-arm must be removed to perform this procedure, Refer to “A-ARM REPLACEMENT” on Page 5.13. Ball Joint 3. Carefully tap on the upper A-arm near the top ball joint while lifting up on the upper A-arm. Upper A-arm Retaining Ring 2. Remove the retaining ring from the ball joint. Upper A-arm Shown 5.8 RepairPro Service Manual BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION 3. A driver must be used for the removal of the ball joints. Use the dimensions below to fabricate or locate the correct size driver to use in the following process. Installation 1. Driver Dimensions 1.375 in. (3.49 cm) Place the A-arm in the correct position for ball joint installation. Face the A-arm end flat on top of the driver. Carefully drive the ball joint into place until the ball joint is properly installed. 3 in. (7.62 cm) Press into the A-arm in this direction 1.75 in (4.45 cm) * Outside diameter of driver cannot be any larger than 1.75 in. Inside diameter cannot be any smaller than 1.375 in. Driver must be 3 in. or taller. 4. Use a press and correct size driver to remove the ball joint from the A-arm. Upper A-arm Shown Press out of the A-arm in this direction 2. After the new ball joint is installed into the A-arm, install a NEW retaining ring. Upon A-arm installation onto the steering hub, install a NEW cotter key. Nut & Washer NEW Retaining Ring NEW Cotter Key Lower A-arm Upper A-arm Shown NOTE: The driver must fit the inside diameter of the A-arm. This will allow the ball joint to be properly pressed out of the A-arm without damaging the Aarm. Ball Joint Correct Driver Placement Ball Joint The driver must fit the inside diameter of the A-arm end. Upper A - arm Lower A-arm Shown NEW Retaining Ring Nut & Washer NEW Cotter Key 5.9 5 BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION FRONT HUB Exploded View 12 8 10 11 15 19 13 7 6 5 2 3 4 14 18 9 17 1 Ref. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 5.10 Qty. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 8 2 2 2 2 2 8 2 2 8 2 2 16 Description Nut, Castle Pin, Cotter Washer Spacer, Outer Seal Bearing, Ball, Sealed Hub, Wheel, Front, Indy Red Stud Spacer, Tapered Bearing, Ball Seal Disc, Brake Spacer, Inner Bolt Rim, Front Valve, Rim Nut, Flange Tire, Front, 21x7–10 Guard, Disc, Outer RepairPro Service Manual BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION Hub Removal 1. 5. Remove outer brake disc guard, cotter pin, front spindle nut, and washer. 6. Remove the outer spacer from the spindle. Inspect outer spacer for wear, replace if needed. Elevate front end of ATV and safely support machine under footrest / frame area. CAUTION Serious injury may result if machine tips or falls. Be sure machine is secure before beginning this service procedure. Wear eye protection when removing bearings and seals. 2. Check bearings for side play by grasping tire / wheel firmly (top and bottom, side to side) and checking for movement. It should rotate smoothly without binding or rough spots. Outer Spacer 3. Remove wheel nuts and wheel. 4. Remove the two brake caliper bolts and the brake caliper. Use mechanic’s wire or other suitable material to support the caliper assembly. Do not allow caliper assembly to hang by the brake line! 7. 5 Remove the hub from the spindle. Remove the inner spacer from the spindle. Inspect the inner spacer for wear, replace if needed. Inner Spacer Brake Caliper Bolts 8. Rotate each bearing inside the hub by hand and check for smooth rotation. Visually inspect bearing for moisture, dirt, or corrosion. Replace bearing if moisture, dirt, corrosion, or roughness is evident. 5.11 BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION Hub Disassembly Hub Assembly 1. 1. Place a shop towel on hub to protect surface. Carefully pry seal out of hub. Drive or press one new bearing into hub using a bearing driver. Seals (2) Hub Seal Tapered Spacer Bearings (2) 2. Using a brass drift, tap bearing spacer to one side to expose inner bearing race. Drive bearing out using a drift through opposite side of hub and discard. CAUTION Do not drive on the inner race of the bearing. Tap Spacer to the side Premium All- Season Grease (PN 2871322) (3 oz. Tube) (PN 2871423) (14 oz. Tube) 2. 3. 3. 4. 5. Remove spacer. Drive other bearing out and discard. Clean hub and spacer thoroughly. Inspect spacer for wear or damage. Measure the tapered spacer for wear, replace as needed. Coat bearing spacer with grease and install into hub. Drive or press the other bearing into hub until seated against spacer. Install seal into hub (with numbers facing out) until flush with end of seal bore. Seal Tapered Spacer .774 + .005 .797 + .005 5.12 RepairPro Service Manual BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION Hub Installation 1. 2. Apply anti-seize compound to spindle area, this will aid in easier removal of the wheel in the future. Inspect spindle and bearing surface for wear or damage. Install the inner spacer. 7. Rotate hub. It should rotate smoothly without binding, rough spots or side play. 8. Install brake caliper. Tighten bolts to 18 ft.lbs. (24 Nm). Inner Spacer 18 ft. lbs. (24 Nm) Apply anti-seize compound 3. Install hub on spindle. Install the outer spacer. Outer Spacer 4. 9. Install the brake disc guard. 10. Install the wheel and four wheel nuts finger tight. Lower the ATV and torque the wheel nuts to 30-35 ft. lbs. (41-47 Nm). Install the washer and spindle nut. Torque the spindle nut to 40 ft. lbs. (54 Nm). Front Wheel Torque Front Wheel Nuts (4) 30-35 ft. lbs. (41-47 Nm) Front Spindle Nut 40 ft. lbs. (54 Nm) 5. 6. Install a new cotter pin. Tighten nut slightly if necessary to align cotter pin holes. Bend both ends of cotter pin around end of spindle in different directions. 5.13 5 BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION FRONT SUSPENSION EXPLODED VIEW Use new cotter pins upon reassembly. Install with open end toward rear of machine. C I J H C E D G L B 33 ft. lbs. (45 Nm) F L B D J M I A 40 ft. lbs. (54 Nm) K A 40 ft. lbs. (54 Nm) 33 ft. lbs. (45 Nm) 5.14 A. Springs B. IFP Shock C. Upper A-Arm D. Lower A-Arm E. A-Arm Shaft F. Bushings G. Bolt H. Flange Nut I. Steering Knuckle J. Ball Joints K. Cotter Pins L. Retainer Rings M. Inner Disc Guard RepairPro Service Manual BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION FRONT A-ARM REPLACEMENT 6. Examine A–arm shafts (I). Replace if worn. Discard hardware. A-arm Removal and Inspection 1. Elevate and safely support vehicle. Remove the front wheel(s). 2. Remove the upper and lower ball joint cotter pins (A) from the ball joint studs (B & C) at wheel end of A–arm. Remove the ball joint nuts until the nuts are flush with end of the ball joints studs. 3. Push up on the upper A-arm (D) to remove the A-arm from the steering knuckle (E). Push down on the lower A-arm (F) to remove the A-arm from the steering knuckle (E). I H G B 5 D E A F A-arm Installation 1. Insert A–arm shaft (I) into the new A–arm (D & F). 2. Install new A–arm assembly onto vehicle frame (upper and lower). Torque bolts to 33 ft. lbs. (45 Nm). 3. Attach upper A-arm (D) and lower A–arm (F) to steering knuckle (E). Attach shock with bolts (G). Tighten all fasteners to 33 ft. lbs. (45 Nm). If ball joint cotter pin holes are not aligned, tighten nut slightly to align. Install a new cotter pin with open ends toward rear of machine (upper and lower). Bend ends in opposite directions around nut. 4. Locate grease fittings at the end of each A–arm tube and pump A–arm ends full of grease. C 4. 5. Remove the lower shock bolt (G) from the lower A-arm and remove the shock from the A-arm. Loosen two bolts on the A–arm tubes (H) (upper and lower A-arms) until A–arm can be removed. WARNING Upon A–arm installation completion, test vehicle at low speeds before putting into regular service. A-arm Attaching Bolt Torque: Ball Joint Stud Nut Torque: Front Shock Bolt Torque: 33 ft. lbs. (45 Nm) 5.15 BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION REAR SUSPENSION EXPLODED VIEW C 33 ft. lbs. (45 Nm) J I D 30 ft. lbs. (41 Nm) C E I 33 ft. lbs. (45 Nm) F B F 9 ft. lbs. (12 Nm) J A D J K I E 33 ft. lbs. (45 Nm) H J G 30 ft. lbs. (41 Nm) B 33 ft. lbs. (45 Nm) A. Hub Carrier Assembly B. Torsion Bar Assembly C. Upper A-Arm D. Lower A-Arm E. Guard F. Bushings G. Bolt H. Flange Nut I. Needle Bearing J. Bearing Seals 5.16 RepairPro Service Manual BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION REAR A-ARM REPLACEMENT NOTE: Rear A-arm mounts contain needle bearings A-arm Removal 1. 2. Elevate and safely support vehicle. Remove the rear wheel(s). Loosen the upper and lower hub carrier bolts at the wheel end of A–arms (A)(C). E D I H C D H G G D F E E I 5 E B A-arm Inspection A 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 1. Disassemble, clean and inspect the upper A-arm bushings and shaft. Replace components as required. Remove the lower shock bolt from the lower A-arm hole (B) and remove the shock from the A-arm. Remove bolt (A) on the lower A–arm tube and pry the hub carrier up and away from the A-arm. Remove bolt (C) on the upper A–arm tube and pry the hub carrier down and away from the A-arm. Remove remaining bolts (D) from A-arms and remove Aarms from frame. Examine A–arm shafts (E), needle bearings (F), seals (G), thrust washers (H) and bushings (I). Replace if worn or damaged. 5.17 BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION 2. Disassemble, clean and inspect the lower A-arm thrust washers, needle bearing, seals and shaft. Replace components as required. NOTE: Apply grease to the inside of the needle bearings before inserting shaft. A Inspect A 6. 3. 4. Insert A–arm shafts, seals and thrust washers into the A– arm mounting bores. Inspect needle bearing performance by rotating the shaft inside the bearing (circled). If replacement is required, press the bearings out from opposite sides using a drift punch or other suitable tool. Press needle bearings (A) from the A-arms using a drift punch or other suitable tool. Do not re-use bearings once they have been removed. A A A-arm Installation 1. 2. 5. Press new needle bearings (A) into the A-arms, centering bearing in the bore. Press only on the outside diameter of the bearing. Verify that an equal amount of space remains on each side to allow for seal installation. 3. Install A–arm assemblies onto vehicle frame (upper and lower). Torque bolts to 33 ft. lbs. (45 Nm). Attach upper A-arm and lower A–arm to hub carrier. (E). Tighten both fasteners to 33 ft. lbs. (45 Nm). Locate grease fittings at the upper and lower A-arm bushings and pump full of grease. WARNING Upon A–arm installation completion, test vehicle at low speeds before putting into regular service. 5.18 RepairPro Service Manual BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION REAR HOUSING Exploded View G H F E A D B C I B 5 D A CV Ball/Cage Assembly Individual Parts Not Available - Order Hub Assembly A. CV Boot Retaining Ring B. Inner CV Boot C. Sprocket Hub D. Bearing (2) E. Rear Axle Housing F. O-Ring G. Rear Brake Disc Hub H. Brake Hub Retaining Ring 5.19 BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION Housing Removal 9. Remove brake disc and drive sprocket from rear housing. This provides the necessary clearance for housing removal. 1. 2. With ATV on the ground, loosen wheel nuts and hub nuts. Safely lift and support the rear of the ATV under the main frame. 3. Remove both rear wheels and hubs. 4. Loosen rear housing mounting bolts and chain adjustment. 5. Remove drive chain. 6. Remove rear caliper and secure out of the way. NOTE: Do not allow the caliper to hang by the brake line. Brake line damage may result. 7. Remove both upper carrier bolts and secure upper a-arms out of the way. 10. Remove rear housing mounting bolts and chain adjustment components. 8. Tilt each hub carrier outward while pulling rear CV shaft end from carrier assembly. A 11. Lift and rotate rear housing and angle out of the ATV frame, exiting the frame from either side. NOTE: Removal of rear shock may be necessary to gain adequate clearance for rear housing removal. 5.20 RepairPro Service Manual BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION Housing Disassembly / Service 1. 2. 3. 4. 6. Using a flat blade screwdriver, carefully pry the retaining rings from both CV ball cages. 7. Remove the CV ball cage retaining rings from the housing. Place housing in a suitable holding fixture. Remove both boot clamps from their locations. Using a flat blade screwdriver, carefully pry the retaining ring from each boot. Remove the retaining rings from both inner boots of the rear housing. 5 8. 5. Remove the inner CV joints and shaft assemblies from the carrier housing. Remove both inner boots by pulling outward on boot. A blunt prying tool may be required to break the sealing area. NOTE: Inner CV joint parts are not replaceable. Order new hub assembly if damaged beyond serviceable condition. NOTE: Inner CV boots are sealed to housing. Use caution during removal. Boot damage may result. 5.21 BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION 9. To disassemble the inner CV joint, place the CV end on a vise and use a punch to tap the driveshaft out. 11. To reassemble the inner CV joint, use special Hi Temp CV joint grease to allow the rollers to “stick” to the cage. Insert the rollers into the outer cage, then insert the inner joint sideways 180 degrees into the cage assembly and turn the inner joint to capture the rollers. The chamfered end should be facing toward the drive shaft. 12. Using a soft faced hammer, tap the drive shaft into the chamfered end of the inner CV assembly until it locks in place. Lubricate the inner CV assembly liberally with joint grease before housing reassembly. 13. Before pressing the brake and sprocket hubs apart, remove the sprocket hub snap ring. IMPORTANT: Note the orientation of the parts for reassembly. Inner CV joint parts are not replaceable. Replace hub assembly if joints are damaged NOTE: Drive shaft inserts into chamfered end 14. Using Special Tool PN PA-48282, press the rear hub assembly apart to access the carrier bearings. 10. The inner CV joint can be disassembled by rotating the inner joint approximately 180 degrees and pulling out. Clean and inspect the joint and rollers for cracks or rough surfaces. Replace the hub assembly if damage is found. Brake Hub Assembly 180° Rear Hub Tool PA - 48282 5.22 RepairPro Service Manual BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION 15. Using a suitable holding fixture, press or tap the carrier bearings out the opposite end of each housing. NOTE: Do not reuse the bearings if removed. 3. Using Special Tool PN PA-48282, press the rear hub assembly together. Verify o-ring is seated properly during reassembly. Bearing Assembly Rear Hub Tool PA - 48282 1. Using a suitable holding fixture, press or tap the carrier bearings into the housing. NOTE: Do not reuse the bearings if removed. 4. 5 Install the sprocket hub snap ring. Bearing 2. Apply sealant to the sprocket hub splines before assembly. Sprocket Hub Assembly O-ring 5.23 BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION 5. Pack the housing assembly and inner boots with a total of 8.75 oz. of Hi-Temperature CV joint grease. Distribute grease evenly. 8. Clean and apply a thin coat of sealant to both the boot and sealing surface before installing inner boots. Install retaining rings. Apply sealant before assembly CV GREASE NOTE: Use Special Hi-Temp CV Grease 8.75 oz. (248.05 grams) Rear Housing Hi-Temp CV Grease Capacity: 8.75 oz. (248.05 grams) 6. Install the inner CV ball cage and retaining rings. 7. Ensure the retaining ring is seated properly in the rear housing groove. 9. Install boot clamps. NOTE: Before tightening boot clamp on inboard joints, make sure any air pressure which may have built up in joint boot has been released using the boot ‘burping’ process. The air should be released after the plunging joint has been centered properly. Tighten boot clamps using boot clamp pliers. Installation 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 5.24 Reverse the steps described in the Removal/ Disassembly procedure. Attach the rear housing mounting bolts, chain adjustment components and brackets. Torque brackets to 17 ft.lbs. (23 Nm). Do not tighten chain adjustment or housing bolts until chain adjustment has been completed. Attach the brake disc and drive sprocket to rear housing. Install and torque the brake disc bolts to 18 ft.lbs. (25 Nm). Install and torque the drive sprocket bolts to 26 ft.lbs. (35 Nm). Install each rear CV shaft end into hub carrier from and attach the upper a-arm to the hub carrier. RepairPro Service Manual BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION 7. Insert and torque the a-arm mount bolts to 30 ft.lbs. (41 Nm). Carrier Bolt Torque: Carrier Disassembly / Inspection 1. Remove outer snap ring. 2. From the back side, tap on the outer bearing race with a drift punch in the reliefs as shown. 30 ft.lbs. (41 Nm) 5 8. 9. Follow chain adjustment procedures. Torque remaining rear housing fasteners to 30 ft.lbs. (41 Nm) after completion of chain adjustment. 10. Install rear hubs, cone washer and nut. Verify cone washer domed side faces outward. Torque hub nut to 90 ft.lbs. (122 Nm) and install cotter pin. REAR BEARING CARRIER Carrier Removal 1. 2. Remove rear wheel and hub. Remove upper carrier bolt and secure upper A-arm out of the way. Tip hub carrier outward and remove shaft end from carrier. Remove lower carrier bolt. NOTE: Drive bearing out evenly by tapping on outer race only. Once bearing is at bottom of casting, support casting on outer edges so bearing can be removed. 3. Inspect bearing. NOTE: Due to extremely close tolerances and minimal wear, the bearings must be inspected visually, and by feel. While rotating bearings by hand, inspect for rough spots, discoloration, or corrosion. The bearings should turn smoothly and quietly, with no detectable up and down movement and minimal movement sideways between inner and outer race. 4. Inspect bearing housing for scratches, wear or damage. Replace housing if damaged. 5.25 BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION 5. 6. Disassemble, clean and inspect the upper A-arm bushings and shaft. Replace components as required. Disassemble, clean and inspect the lower A-arm thrust washers, needle bearing, seals and shaft. Replace components as required. Carrier Assembly 1. Assemble and install the upper A-arm bushings and shaft. 2. Install needle bearings by pressing the bearings into the housing using a suitable tool. Thrust Washer Seal Needle Bearing Shaft Bearing Installation 7. Inspect needle bearing performance by rotating the shaft inside the bearing. If replacement is required, press the bearings out from opposite sides using a drift punch or other suitable tool. 3. Apply grease and install the shaft. Install the lower A-arm seals. Thrust Washer Seal Shaft Bearing Removal 5.26 RepairPro Service Manual BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION 4. Support bottom of bearing carrier housing and start bearing in housing 5. Press bearing into place until outer race bottoms on housing. 4. Lift bearing carrier until top aligns with upper control arm. Install and torque upper control arm bolt and torque to specification. Torque lower control arm bolts to specification. Apply grease to zerk. Lower Control Arm Bolt Torque: 33 ft. lbs. (45 Nm) Upper Control Arm Bolt Torque: 33 ft. lbs. (45 Nm) 5. 6. 7. 8. 5 Pull drive shaft outward and install hub onto driveshaft splines. Install cone washer domed side facing outward. Install retainer nut, wheel and wheel nuts. Remove jackstand and torque hub nut and wheel nuts to specification. CAUTION Use an arbor press only on the outer race. Bearing damage may occur. 6. Install snap ring into groove. Carrier Installation 1. 2. 3. Insert bearing carrier on drive shaft. Align bottom of carrier housing and lower control arm. Grease and slide lower control arm bushings into place, securing corner housing. Install both lower control arm bolts. Hub Nut Torque: 90 ft.lbs. (122Nm). Wheel Nut Torque: 30-35 ft.lbs. (41-47 Nm). 5.27 BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION 9. Install a new cotter pin. Tighten nut slightly to align holes if required. 2. REAR DRIVE (CV) JOINT Photo below is shown without shaft for clarity. Wipe grease away from recess in CV joint inner hub and locate snap ring Snap Ring Located in Recessed Area CV Joint Removal 1. 2. Remove rear wheel and hub. Remove upper carrier bolt and secure upper A-arm out of the way. Tip hub carrier outward and remove shaft end from carrier. NOTE: CV joint service can be performed with driveshaft attached to rear carrier housing. Snap Ring 3. Open the snap ring using a snap ring pliers or small needle nose pliers. Tap CV housing off shaft with a soft faced hammer while holding snap ring open. Spread ends of snap ring to remove joint from shaft CV Joint Service 1. Tap CV housing off shaft Remove clamps from rubber boot(s) using the CV Boot Clamp Pliers (PN 8700226) (A). A 4. 5.28 Place a new snap ring in the groove of the CV joint inner hub, with tabs facing the shaft as shown. RepairPro Service Manual BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION CV Boot Replacement Tabs face shaft 1. Remove CV joint from end of shaft. 2. Remove boot from shaft. NOTE: When replacing a damaged boot, check the grease for contamination by rubbing it between two fingers. A gritty feel indicates contamination. If the grease is not contaminated, the boot can be replaced without cleaning the CV joint. Use the recommended amount of grease for boot replacement only (see below). Proceed to Boot Installation. 3. 5. 6. 7. Refit CV joint on interconnecting shaft by tapping with a plastic hammer on the joint housing. Take care not to damage threads on the outboard CV joint. The joint is fully assembled when the snap ring is located in the groove on the interconnecting shaft. Tap joint onto shaft Install and tighten large boot clamp with boot clamp pliers. Remove excess grease from the CV joint's external surfaces and position joint boot over housing, making sure boot is seated in groove. Position clamp over boot end and make sure clamp tabs are located in slots. NOTE: NOTE: Before tightening boot clamp on inboard joint, make sure any air pressure which may have built up in joint boot has been released. The air should be released after the plunging joint has been centered properly. Tighten boot clamp using boot clamp pliers. Thoroughly clean and dry the CV joint and inspect ball tracks and cages for wear, cracks or other damage. NOTE: Shiny areas in ball tracks and on the cage spheres are normal. Do not replace CV joints because parts have polished surfaces. Replace CV joint only if components are cracked, broken, worn or otherwise unserviceable. 5 4. 5. 6. 7. Add the recommended amount of grease for CV joint cleaning to the joint as required. Be sure grease penetrates all parts of the joint. Refit CV joint on interconnecting shaft by tapping with a plastic hammer on the joint housing. Take care not to damage threads on the outboard CV joint. The joint is fully assembled when the snap ring is located in the groove on the interconnecting shaft. Add grease through large end of boot. Install a new boot onto the axle shaft and fill the CV joint and boot with the correct type and amount of grease. 5.29 BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION 8. While pulling out on the CV shaft, fully extend the CV joint and slide a straight O-ring pick or a small slotted screw driver between the small end of the boot and the shaft. This will allow the air pressure to equalize in the CV boot in the position that the joint will spend most of its life. Before you remove your instrument, be sure the small end of the boot is in its correct location on the axle. CARE MUST BE TAKEN TO AVOID DAMAGE TO THE NEWLY INSTALLED BOOT. CV Joint Installation 1. Slide shaft assembly into bearing carrier hub. 2. 3. 4. Apply anti-seize compound to splines of shaft. Install a new lock ring and install the shaft. Lift bearing carrier into place and install bolt to upper control arm. Torque bolt to 33 ft. lbs. (45 Nm). 5. Install hub, flat washer, domed washer (domed side out) and nut. Torque center hub nut to 90 ft. lbs. (122 Nm). Install new cotter pin and hub cap. 9. Install the small clamp on the boot. 10. Be sure to use only the Constant Velocity Joint grease supplied with boot service kit. IF CV JOINT WAS CLEANED, add the required amount of grease to the joint in addition to the grease pack supplied with boot kit. NOTE: CV Joint Grease Capacity: Boot Capacity 30 Grams CV Joint Grease Outboard Joints - 3.5 oz. (99.2 grams) each 5.30 RepairPro Service Manual BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION 6. Install rear wheel and torque wheel nuts to specification. 90 ft.lbs. (122 Nm) DECALS Replacement WARNING The following procedure involves the use of an open flame. Perform this procedure in a well ventilated area, away from gasoline or other flammable materials. Be sure the area to be flame treated is clean and free of gasoline or flammable residue. Refer to Chapter 2 for Wheel Nut Torque. The side panels, front and rear fender cabs are plastic polyethylene material. Therefore, they must be “flame treated” prior to installing a decal to ensure good adhesion. A bonus of the flame treating procedure is it can be used to reduce or eliminate the whitish stress marks that are sometimes left after a fender or cab is bent, flexed, or damaged. To flame treat the decal area: 1. 2. Pass the flame of a propane torch back and forth quickly over the area where the decal is to be applied until the surface appears slightly glossy. This should occur after just a few seconds of flame treating. Do not hold the torch too close to the surface (2-3 inches from the flame tip is recommended). Keep the torch moving to prevent damage. Apply the decal on one edge first. Slowly lay down remainder of the decal while rubbing lightly over the decal surface to eliminate any air bubbles during the application. 5.31 5 BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION FRONT SHOCK EXPLODED VIEW RydeFX™ FRONT SHOCK 5 1 2 4 6 11 7 8 9 3 10 1 13 12 Ref. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 5.32 Description Bushing Sleeve Spring Retainer Nut Compression Bumper Upper Mount Shaft Piston / Wear Band / Top-Out & Bottom-Out Washers Ref. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 2 Description Nut IFP IFP O-Ring Cylinder Head Asm Pressure Valve Valve Screw RepairPro Service Manual BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION REAR SHOCK EXPLODED VIEW RydeFX™ REAR SHOCK (Compression Adjustable) 5 4 6 11 5 7 8 9 3 10 1 12 13 Ref. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 2 Description Bushing Sleeve Spring Retainer Nut Compression Bumper Upper Mount Shaft Piston / Wear Band / Top-Out & Bottom-Out Washers Ref. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Description Nut IFP IFP O-Ring Cylinder Head Asm Pressure Valve Valve Screw 5.33 BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION RYDE FX™ SHOCK SERVICE Shock Specification Chart Shown below is an example of how valving stacks are arranged. NOTE: Direction of the valve piston before disassembly. The side with the greater number of slots should face the IFP (nut end of the shaft). Changing oil on RydeFX™ Shocks is recommended annually and should NOT be performed during end of season storage preparation. For competition use, shocks should be disassembled and serviced more frequently. Piston Orientation NOTE: Orifice must be drilled to required size on replacement valve pistons. 5.34 RepairPro Service Manual BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION RydeFX™ Shock Rebuild Procedure Required Tools NOTE: Before unscrewing pre-load springs, measure the compressed length of the installed spring and mark position for reinstallation. • RydeFX Gas Charge Tool (Inflation Needle) CAUTION • RydeFX I.F.P Extraction / Locator Tool When removing the spring from a shock that utilizes a fixed lower retainer; the use of a proper spring compressor should be used to avoid risk of bodily injury. • Adjustable Wrench • 5/64” Hex Key • Slotted Head Screwdriver • Torque Wrench 3. • Vernier Caliper or Micrometer Wash the shock body in parts cleaner; then dry with compressed air to remove sand and dirt. WARNING • Rod Thimble • Rod Blocks When using compressed air to dry components, protective eye wear should be worn to avoid risk of injury. • Pic Tool • Shock Spring Compressor • Nitrogen Regulator 4. DISASSEMBLY WARNING Remove bearing, sleeve and/or bushings from lower shock mount eyelet. Secure the lower mount of the shock in a vise. The use of soft jaws is recommend to prevent damage or marks to the shock. Before servicing a gas shock it is important that all the gas pressure be discharged from the unit. Refer to the instructions listed below for the proper procedure of discharging the gas pressure from a shock. Protective eye wear should be worn to avoid risk of injury while servicing RydeFX™ gas charged mono-tube shocks. 1. 2. Remove the shock from the vehicle. If shock incorporates a spring; remove spring and collateral retainers. CAUTION It is important that the gas shock be retained in the vise by the lower mount. Any other method of securing the shock body during these procedures may deform the shock body cylinder. 5.35 5 BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION 5. Remove the small button head screw from the pressure valve assembly. 7. Remove the pressure valve assembly from the lower end mount. Account for an O-ring. 6. Using a slotted screwdriver, loosen the pressure valve assembly counter-clockwise two full revolutions allowing the gas pressure to fully escape past the pressure valve assembly O-ring. 8. With an adjustable wrench, loosen and remove cylinder head assembly. 9. Pour the oil out of the shock body. Discard old oil into an approved storage container and dispose appropriately. Never reuse damper oil during shock rebuild. WARNING Nitrogen gas is under extreme pressure. Use caution when releasing nitrogen gas from shock. Protective eye wear should be worn to avoid risk of injury. CAUTION Allow all the gas pressure to escape before proceeding with the removal of the pressure valve assembly. Pressurized gas and shock oil could eject the valve assembly from the cylinder resulting in bodily injury. 5.36 10. Using the I.F.P extraction tool, thread the tool into the I.F.P and pull upwards, removing the I.F.P from the shock body. Account for wear band and an O-ring. RepairPro Service Manual BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION 11. Clean the inside of the shock body using clean partscleaning solvent and blow dry using compressed air. 12. Place the shock piston rod upper mount in bench vise, begin piston and valve removal. Arrange parts removed in the sequence of disassembly. ASSEMBLY 1. Front Shock Part# 7043259 Place the piston rod upper mount into the vise. Reassemble damper rod assembly in the reverse order of disassembly. Pay special attention to the order of the Rebound and Compression disc (shim) stacks, ensuring that they are in the same order prior to disassembly. Tighten the lock nut to15-20 ft. lbs. (20-27 Nm) of torque. Rear Shock Part# 7043260 CAUTION 5 DO NOT OVER-TORQUE. If excessive torque is applied, damage to the piston and valves will occur. 2. Secure the shock body by its lower mount in vise. The use of soft jaws is recommended to prevent damage or marks to the shock. Items to inspect: • Piston rod for straightness, nicks or burrs. • Cylinder Head Assembly / DU Bearing - clean, inspect, or replace. • Inside of shock body for scratches, burrs or excessive wear. • Teflon piston and I.F.P wear band for cuts, chipped or nicked edges, or excessive wear. • O-rings for nicks, cuts, or cracks. • Cap and rod seals for nicks, cuts or cracks. • Valve discs for kinks or waves. • Compression bumpers for chipping, cracking or being missing. CAUTION It is important that the gas shock be retained in the vice by the lower mount. Any other method of securing the shock body during these procedures may deform the shock body cylinder. Should any of these items be in question replacement is recommended. 5.37 BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION 3. Thread the positioning head onto the I.F.P locator tool and adjust the top of the value indicator to the appropriate measurement. 7. Screw the pressure valve assembly into the valve port by hand with a slotted head screwdriver. Tighten to 100-110 in. lbs. (11-12 Nm) of torque. NOTE: Depending on which shock absorber is being worked on, adjust the piston location tool to the specified depth indicated in the shock specification chart, located on the bottom of Page 5.34. 8. Fill the shock body with shock oil to the bottom of the threads within the cylinder. 4. Apply a thin film of oil onto the floating wear band and Oring and install the floating piston into the top of the shock body, positioning it below the counterbore. NOTE: After filling the shock body with oil, allow a couple of minutes for all air bubbles to rise to the top. Polaris Gas Shock Oil - P/N 2870995 5. Using the tool as a handle, push the floating piston down into the shock body, being careful not to damage I.F.P wear band and O-ring, until the value indicator knob comes in contact with the shock body. The piston should now be located correctly. 9. 6. Apply a light film of grease to the pressure valve port counterbore through 360º, where the pressure valve assembly O-ring meets. 10. Slowly push the piston rod and assembly into shock body until the cylinder head assembly bottoms on the cylinder counterbore. Slight up and down movement may be required to allow all air to pass through piston assembly. 5.38 With the cylinder head assembly pushed down against the piston, carefully, insert the piston rod and assembly into the cylinder; Slightly oscillating the piston rod to allow piston to enter shock body bore. A light coating of oil on the piston wear band will ease installation. RepairPro Service Manual BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION NOTE: During installation, some shock oil will overflow. Wrap a shop cloth around shock body to catch possible oil overflow. NOTE: Fast installation of the piston rod and assembly may displace the floating piston from its original position. This must not occur if the damper is expected to perform as designed 13. Using a flat head screw driver, turn the compression adjusting cam clockwise to ensure there is positive engagement of the internal adjusting rod with the surface of the adjusting cam. Only applicable for the rear shock absorber P/N: 7043260. 11. Using an adjustable wrench tighten cylinder head securely into the shock cylinder. 14. Install the small button head screw in the pressure valve assembly and tighten securely. 15. Reinstall sleeve and bushings in lower shock mount. 5 12. Pressurize the shock through the pressure valve with nitrogen gas to the specified pressure. Nitrogen Gas Pressure - 200 psi NOTE: After being compressed, the piston rod should fully extend from the shock body once the shock has been pressurized. 5.39 BODY / STEERING / SUSPENSION NOTES 5.40 RepairPro Service Manual BRAKES CHAPTER 6 BRAKES BRAKE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 BRAKE CALIPER EXPLODED VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 REAR BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 FRONT BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 BRAKE SYSTEM OVERVIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 FRONT BRAKE SYSTEM - EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 REAR BRAKE SYSTEM - EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 SERVICE NOTES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6 BRAKE NOISE TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7 BRAKE FLUID REPLACEMENT AND BLEEDING PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 MASTER CYLINDER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10 REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11 FRONT CALIPER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12 CALIPER REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12 CALIPER INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13 CALIPER REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14 CALIPER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14 FRONT BRAKE PADS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15 6 PAD REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15 PAD ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16 BRAKE BURNISHING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16 FRONT BRAKE DISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17 DISC INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17 DISC REMOVAL / REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17 REAR CALIPER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18 CALIPER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18 CALIPER DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18 CALIPER INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19 CALIPER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19 REAR BRAKE PAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20 PAD REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20 PAD INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.21 REAR BRAKE DISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.22 DISC INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.22 DISC REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.23 DISC REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.23 TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.24 BRAKES SQUEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.24 POOR BRAKE PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.24 LEVER VIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.24 BRAKES LOCK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.24 6.1 BRAKES BRAKE SPECIFICATIONS General Specifications FRONT BRAKE CALIPER Item Brake Pad Thickness Brake Disc Thickness Brake Disc Thickness Variance Between Measurements Brake Disc Runout RH Handle Bar Master Cylinder I.D. Item Brake Pad Thickness Brake Disc Thickness Brake Disc Thickness Variance Between Measurements Brake Disc Runout Master Cylinder I.D. – Aux. Rear Standard .298″ / 7.6 mm .158” / 4.013 mm Service Limit .180″ / 4.6 mm .140″ / 3.556 mm – .002″ / .051 mm – – REAR BRAKE CALIPER Standard .298″ / 7.6 mm .158” / 4.013 mm .010″ / .254 mm .551” / 14 mm Service Limit .180″ / 4.6 mm .140″ / 3.556 mm – .002″ / .051 mm – .010″ / .254 mm .500” / 12.7 mm Torque Specifications ITEM Front Caliper Mounting Bolts Rear Caliper Mounting Bolts Rear Master Cylinder Mounting Bolts Front Master Cylinder Reservoir Cover Bolts Brake Line Banjo Bolts Brake Disc Mounting Bolts Wheel Mounting Nuts Front Master Cylinder Clamp Bolts Rear Caliper Bleed Screws Front Caliper Bleed Screws Rear Caliper Slide Bolts Rear Caliper Anvil Bolts Rear Hub Nut Upper A-arm Bolt TORQUE (ft. lbs. except where noted) TORQUE (Nm) 18 18 8 11 (in. lbs.) 15 18 25 85 (in. lbs.) 27 (in. lbs.) 47 (in. lbs.) 33 16-18 90 30 24 24 11 1.24 20 24 34 9.6 3.1 5.3 45 22-24 122 41 NOTE: Refer to the tightening procedures in this chapter when torquing the bolts. Some special procedures are used when torquing certain bolts and fasteners. Special Tools 6.2 Part Number Tool Description 2870975 Mity Vac™ RepairPro Service Manual BRAKES BRAKE CALIPER EXPLODED VIEWS Rear Brake Caliper Assembly A 16-18 ft.lbs. (22-24 Nm) Apply Polaris DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid to component. 33 ft.lbs. (45 Nm) H E C D B 27 in lbs. (3.1 Nm) G I K A. Anvil Bolts B. Bleed Screws C. Washers D. O-rings E. Rear Housing F. Seals G. Piston H. Slide Pins I. Bushings J. Seal K. Bracket L. Pad M. Front Housing N. Retaining Clips F J M L N 6 Front Brake Caliper Assembly Apply Polaris DOT 3 or DOT 4 Brake Fluid to Component A Apply Polaris All Purpose Grease B 47 in lbs. (5.3 Nm) E G H C A. Socket Set Screw B. Bleeder Screw C. Caliper Assy. D. Boot E. Square O-ring F. Piston G. Caliper Mount H. Brake Pads D F 6.3 BRAKES BRAKE SYSTEM OVERVIEW Front Brake System - Exploded View A. Master Cylinder B. Brake Line C. Mechanical Brake Switch D. Wheel Hub E. Banjo Bolt & Washers F. Caliper G. Caliper Mount Bolt C 15 ft. lbs. (20 Nm) 85 in. lbs. (9.6 Nm) B B A B 18 ft. lbs. (24 Nm) 15 ft. lbs. (20 Nm) G E D F 6.4 RepairPro Service Manual BRAKES Rear Brake System - Exploded View 18 ft. lbs. (24 Nm) H C 15 ft. lbs. (20 Nm) J B D I 15 ft. lbs. C (20 Nm) F B K 6 A G L E A. Caliper B. Sealing Washer C. Banjo Bolt D. Brake Line E. Clevis Pin F. Master Cylinder Asm. G. Cotter Pin H. Rear Brake Reservoir I. Hose Clamp J. Reservoir Hose K. Brake Switch L. Brake Switch Bracket M. Switch Spring N. Washer O. Bushing P. Torsion Spring Q. Foot Brake R. Large Washer S. Screw M Q O R O N S P 6.5 BRAKES Service Notes Disc brake systems are light weight, low maintenance, and perform well in the conditions ATVs routinely encounter. There are a few things to remember when replacing disc brake pads or performing brake system service to ensure proper system function and maximum pad service life. • Optional pads are available to suit conditions in your area. Select a pad to fit riding style and environment • Do not over-fill the master cylinder fluid reservoirs. • Make sure the brake levers return freely and completely. • Check and adjust master cylinder reservoir fluid levels after pad service. • Make sure atmospheric vent on reservoirs are unobstructed. • Test for brake drag after any brake system service and investigate cause if brake drag is evident. • Make sure caliper moves freely on guide pins. • Inspect caliper piston seals for foreign material that could prevent caliper pistons from returning freely. • Perform a brake burnishing procedure after installing new pads to maximize service life. CAUTION Use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid as an assembly aid for all procedures described in this chapter to prevent brake system contamination. DO NOT USE LUBRICANTS OF ANY KIND FOR ASSEMBLY. Brake Noise Troubleshooting Dirt or dust buildup on the brake pads and disc is the most common cause of brake noise (squeal caused by vibration). If cleaning does not reduce the occurrence of brake noise, check the backing of each pad for worn spots allowing metal to metal contact. See table below: Brake Noise Troubleshooting Possible Cause Dirt, dust, or imbedded material on pads or disc Remedy Spray disc and pads with a non–flammable aerosol brake cleaner only! Remove pads and/or disc hub to clean imbedded material from disc or pads. Pad(s) dragging on disc (noise or premature pad wear) Improper adjustment Insufficient lever or pedal clearance Master cylinder reservoir overfilled Master cylinder compensating port restricted Master cylinder piston not returning completely Caliper piston(s) not returning Operator error (riding the brake / park brake applied) Adjust pad stop (front calipers) Check position of controls & switches Set to proper level Clean compensating port Inspect. Repair as necessary Clean piston(s) seal Educate operator Loose wheel hub or bearings Check wheel and hub for abnormal movement Brake disc warped or excessively worn Replace disc Brake disc misaligned or loose Inspect and repair as necessary Noise is from other source (chain, axle, hub, disc or wheel) If noise does not change when brake is applied check other sources. Inspect and repair as necessary Wrong pad for conditions Change to a softer or harder pad 6.6 RepairPro Service Manual BRAKES Hydraulic System Operation E C F A B D G Typical Hydraulic Brake System The Polaris brake system consists of the following components or assemblies: brake lever; master cylinder; hydraulic hose; brake calipers (slave cylinder); brake pads; and brake discs, which are secured to the drive line. When the hand activated brake lever (A) is applied it contacts a piston (B) within the master cylinder. As the master cylinder piston moves inward it closes a small opening (compensating port) (C) within the cylinder and starts to build pressure within the brake system. As the pressure within the system is increased, the piston (D) located in the brake caliper moves outward and applies pressure to the moveable brake pad. This pad contacts the brake disc and moves the caliper in its floating bracket, pulling the stationary side pad into the brake disc. The resulting friction reduces brake disc and vehicle speed. As the lever pressure is increased, the braking affect is also increased. The friction applied to the brake pads will cause the pads to wear. As these pads wear, the piston within the caliper moves further outward and becomes self adjusting. Fluid from the reservoir fills the additional area created when the caliper piston moves outward. Brake fluid level is critical to proper system operation. Too little fluid will allow air to enter the system and cause the brakes to feel spongy. Too much fluid could cause brakes to drag due to fluid expansion. Located within the master cylinder is the compensating port (C) which is opened and closed by the master cylinder piston assembly. The port is open when the lever is released and the master cylinder piston is outward. As the temperature within the hydraulic system changes, this port compensates for fluid expansion (heated fluid) or contraction (cooled fluid). During system service, be sure this port is open. Due to the high temperatures created within the system during heavy braking, it is very important that the master cylinder reservoir have adequate space to allow for fluid expansion. Never overfill the reservoir! Fill to 1/4” – 5/16” (.64 – .80 cm) from top of the cylinder. This system also incorporates a diaphragm (E) as part of the cover gasket; and a vent port (F) located between the gasket and the cover. The combination diaphragm and vent allow for the air above the fluid to equalize pressure as the fluid expands or contracts. Make sure the vent is open and allowed to function. If the reservoir is over filled or the diaphragm vent is plugged the expanding fluid may build pressure in the brake system leading to brake failure. When servicing Polaris ATV brake systems use only Polaris DOT 3 or DOT 4 Approved High Temperature Brake Fluid. WARNING Once a bottle is opened, use what is necessary and discard the rest in accordance with local laws. Do not store or use a partial bottle of brake fluid. Brake fluid is hygroscopic, meaning it rapidly absorbs moisture. This causes the boiling temperature of the brake fluid to drop, which can lead to brake fade and possible loss of control. 6.7 6 BRAKES Brake Fluid Replacement and Bleeding Procedure NOTE: Do not remove brake lever when reservoir fluid level is low. NOTE: When bleeding the brakes or replacing the fluid always start with the caliper farthest from the master cylinder. CAUTION Always wear safety glasses during these procedures. CAUTION Brake fluid will damage finished surfaces. Do not allow brake fluid to come in contact with finished surfaces. NOTE: This procedure should be used to change fluid or bleed brakes during regular maintenance. 5. Polaris DOT 3 or DOT 4 Brake Fluid 6. Front Brake Caliper Bleeding 1. 2. Add brake fluid to the upper level mark on reservoir. Clean reservoir cover thoroughly. Remove screws, cover, and diaphragm from master cylinder reservoir. Begin bleeding procedure with either front caliper. Install a box end wrench on the caliper bleeder screw. Attach a clean, clear hose to fitting and place the other end in a clean container. Be sure the hose fits tightly on fitting. Bleeder Screw NOTE: Fluid may be forced from compensation port when brake lever is pumped. Place diaphragm in reservoir to prevent spills. Do not install cover. 3. 4. Inspect vent slots in the cover and remove any debris or blockage. If changing fluid, remove old fluid from reservoir with a Mity Vac™ (PN 2870975) or similar tool. 6.8 7. 8. Slowly pump brake lever until pressure builds and holds. While maintaining lever pressure, open bleeder screw. Close bleeder screw and release brake lever. NOTE: Do not release lever before bleeder screw is tight or air may be drawn into caliper. RepairPro Service Manual BRAKES 9. Repeat procedure until clean fluid appears in bleeder hose and all air has been purged. Add fluid as necessary to maintain level in reservoir. Reservoir Cover Torque CAUTION Maintain at least 1/2” (1.27 cm) of brake fluid in the reservoir to prevent air from entering the master cylinder. 11 in. lbs. (1.2 Nm) Rear Brake Caliper Bleeding 1. 2. Clean rear brake fluid reservoir cover thoroughly. Remove the cap and diaphragm from the reservoir. 10. Tighten bleeder screw securely and remove bleeder hose. Torque bleeder screw to 47 in. lbs. (5.3 Nm). 11. Repeat procedure Steps 5-9 for the remaining front caliper. 12. Add brake fluid to the proper level Rear Brake Reservoir 3. 4. If changing fluid, remove old fluid from reservoir with a Mity Vac™ (PN 2870975) or similar tool. Using a funnel, add brake fluid to the MAX level mark on reservoir. Master Cylinder Fuild Level: Add to MAX level inside reservoir. Sight glass must look dark, if sight glass is clear, fluid level is too low 13. Install diaphragm, cover, and screws. Torque the screws to 11 in.lbs. (1.2 Nm). Polaris DOT 3 or DOT 4 Brake Fluid 6.9 6 BRAKES 5. Install a box end wrench on the upper rear caliper bleeder screw. Attach a clean, clear hose to fitting and place the other end in a clean container. Be sure the hose fits tightly on fitting. 11. Field test machine at low speed before putting into service. Check for proper braking action and lever reserve. With lever firmly applied, lever reserve should be no less than 1/2” (1.3 cm) from handlebar. 12. Check brake system for fluid leaks and inspect all hoses and lines for wear or abrasion. Replace hose if wear or abrasion is found. Bleeder Screws MASTER CYLINDER Removal 1. 2. Clean master cylinder and reservoir assembly. Make sure you have a clean work area to disassemble brake components. Place a shop towel under brake line connection at master cylinder. Loosen banjo bolt (A); remove bolt and sealing washers. 6. Slowly pump foot brake lever until pressure builds and holds. 7. While maintaining lever pressure, open bleeder screw. Close bleeder screw and release brake lever. NOTE: Do not release lever before bleeder screw is tight or air may be drawn into caliper. B A 8. Repeat procedure until clean fluid appears in bleeder hose and all air has been purged. Add fluid as necessary to maintain level in reservoir. 9. Tighten bleeder screw securely and remove bleeder hose. Torque bleeder screw to 27 in. lbs. (3.1 Nm). 10. Using a funnel, add brake fluid to the MAX level mark on reservoir. CAUTION Brake fluid will damage finished surfaces. Do not allow brake fluid to come in contact with finished surfaces. 3. Loosen the master cylinder clamp bolts (B) on the handlebar side of the master cylinder. Rear Reservoir Fuild Level: Add to MAX level shown on the outside of the rear reservoir. 6.10 RepairPro Service Manual BRAKES 4. Installation Remove master cylinder from handlebars. 1. Master Cylinder Install master cylinder on handlebars. Torque mounting bolts to 85 in. lbs. (9.6 Nm). Torque the top bolt first. 15 ft. lbs. (20 Nm) Front Brake Line 85 in. lbs. (9.6 Nm) Banjo Bolt 15 ft. lbs. (20 Nm) 15 ft. lbs. Retainer Banjo Bolt (20 Nm) Caliper Mount Bolt 18 ft. lbs. (24 Nm) Caliper NOTE: To speed up the brake bleeding procedure the master cylinder can be purged of air before brake line is attached. Fill with DOT 3 or DOT 4 Brake Fluid and pump lever slowly two to three times with finger over the outlet end to purge master cylinder of air. 2. Master Cylinder Assembly Place new sealing washers on each side of banjo brake line. Install the brake line into the master cylinder. Torque the brake switch bolt to 15 ft.lbs. (20 Nm). Banjo Bolt 15 ft. lbs. (20 Nm) Brake Line Sealing Washers Torque to 15 ft. lbs. (20 Nm) Cover Screws 11 in. lbs. (1.24 Nm) Clamp Bolts 85 in. lbs. (9.6 Nm) Master Cylinder Mounting Clamp Bolt Torque: 85 in. lbs. (9.6 Nm) Banjo Bolt Torque: 15 ft. lbs. (20 Nm) 6.11 6 BRAKES 3. Fill reservoir with DOT 3 or DOT 4 Brake Fluid. 4. Loosen pad adjuster screw 2-3 turns. 5. Remove the upper and lower caliper mounting bolts and remove the caliper assembly from the caliper mount. 6. Push upper pad retainer pin inward and slip brake pads past edge. Polaris DOT 3 or DOT 4 Brake Fluid 4. Follow bleeding procedure. Check all connections for leaks and repair if necessary. FRONT CALIPER SERVICE Caliper Removal and Disassembly 1. 2. Clean caliper area before removal. Elevate and support front of machine. Remove the front wheel. CAUTION Use care when supporting vehicle so that it does not tip or fall. Severe injury may occur if machine tips or falls. 3. Using a line wrench, loosen and remove brake line to caliper. Place a container under caliper to catch fluid draining from brake line. 6.12 RepairPro Service Manual BRAKES 7. Remove mounting bracket, pin assembly and dust boot. Caliper Inspection 1. 8. Inspect caliper body for nicks, scratches or wear. Measure bore size and compare to specifications. Replace if damage is evident or if worn beyond service limit. Remove dust seal and piston seal. Caliper Piston Bore I.D.: Std:. 1.188” (30.2 mm) Service Limit: 1.193” (30.30 mm) 9. 2. Inspect piston for nicks, scratches, wear or damage. Measure diameter and replace if damaged or worn beyond service limit. 3. Inspect the brake disc and pads as outlined for brake pad replacement in this section. See “Brake Pad Inspection” earlier in this chapter. Clean the caliper body, piston, and retaining bracket with brake cleaner or alcohol. Clean Components NOTE: Be sure to clean seal grooves in caliper body. 6.13 6 BRAKES Caliper Reassembly 1. 4. Install new O-rings (A) in the caliper body (B). Be sure groove is clean and free of residue or brakes may drag upon assembly. Compress the mounting bracket and make sure the dust seals are fully seated. Install the brake pads. Clean the disc and pads with brake parts cleaner or denatured alcohol to remove any dirt, oil or grease. C B D A Caliper Installation 2. 3. Coat piston with clean Polaris DOT 3 or DOT 4 Brake Fluid (C). Install piston (D) with a twisting motion while pushing inward. Piston should slide in and out of bore smoothly, with light resistance. Lubricate the mounting bracket pins with Polaris Premium All Season Grease (PN 2871423), and install the rubber dust seal boots. 1. 18 ft. lbs (24 Nm) 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.14 Install caliper and torque mounting bolts. 15 ft.lbs. (20 Nm) Install brake line and tighten securely with a line wrench. Torque the banjo brake lines to the proper torque specification. Install the adjuster screw and turn until stationary pad contacts disc, then back off 1/2 turn. Perform brake bleeding procedure as outlined earlier in this chapter. Install wheels and torque wheel nuts to specification. RepairPro Service Manual BRAKES FRONT BRAKE PADS 5. Push mounting bracket inward and slip outer brake pad past edge. Remove inner pad. 6. Measure the thickness of the pad material. Replace pads if worn beyond the service limit. Pad Removal 1. Elevate and support front of ATV. CAUTION Use care when supporting vehicle so that it does not tip or fall. Severe injury may occur if machine tips or falls. 2. Remove the front wheel. Loosen pad adjuster screw 2-3 turns. 6 3. Remove caliper from mounting bracket. NOTE: When removing caliper, use care not to damage brake line. Support caliper so to avoid kinking or bending brake line. 4. Push caliper piston into caliper bore slowly using a C-clamp or locking pliers with pads installed. Measure Pad Front Brake Pad Thickness New : .298”/ 7.6 mm Service Limit: .180” / 4.6 mm NOTE: Brake fluid will be forced through compensating port into master cylinder fluid reservoir when piston is pushed back into caliper. Remove excess fluid from reservoir as required. 6.15 BRAKES Pad Assembly 1. 3. 18 ft. lbs (24 Nm) Lubricate mounting bracket pins with a light film of Polaris Premium All Season Grease (PN 2871423), and install rubber dust boots. 4. 2. Compress mounting bracket and make sure dust boots are fully seated. Install pads with friction material facing each other. Install caliper on spindle hub and torque mounting bolts. 5. Slowly pump the brake lever until pressure has been built up. Maintain at least 1/2, (12.7 mm) of brake fluid in the reservoir to prevent air from entering the brake system. Install the adjuster screw and turn clockwise until stationary pad contacts disc, then back off 1/2 turn (counterclockwise). 1/2 Turn 6. WARNING If brake pads are contaminated with grease, oil, or liquid soaked do not use the pads. Use only new, clean pads. Verify fluid level in reservoir is up to MAX line inside reservoir and install reservoir cap. 7. Install wheels and torque wheel nuts. NOTE: Front Wheel Nut Torque: Refer to Torque Table at beginning of chapter. Brake Burnishing Procedure It is required that a burnishing procedure be performed after installation of new brake pads to extend service life and reduce noise. Start machine and slowly increase speed to 30 mph. Gradually apply brakes to stop machine. Allow pads and disc to cool sufficiently during the procedure. Do not allow pads or disc to become hot or warping may result. Repeat this procedure 10 times. 6.16 RepairPro Service Manual BRAKES FRONT BRAKE DISC Brake Disc Runout Service Limit .010” (.254 mm) Disc Inspection 1. 2. Visually inspect the brake disc for nicks, scratches, or damage. Measure the disc thickness at 8 different points around the pad contact surface using a 0–1” micrometer. Replace disc if worn beyond service limit. Disc Removal / Replacement 1. Apply heat to the hub in the area of the brake disc mounting bolts to soften the bolt locking agent. 2. Remove bolts and disc. 3. Clean mating surface of disc and hub. 4. Install disc on hub. CAUTION Always use new brake disc mounting bolts. The bolts have a pre–applied locking agent which is destroyed upon removal. 5. Brake Disc Thickness New: .158” (4.013 mm) Service Limit: .140” / 3.556 mm) Install new bolts and tighten to specified torque. 18 ft. lbs. (24 Nm) 6 Brake Disc Thickness Variance Service Limit: .002” (.051 mm) (difference between measurements) 3. Mount dial indicator as shown to measure disc runout. Slowly rotate the disc and read total runout on the dial indicator. Replace the disc if runout exceeds specifications. Front Brake Disc Mounting Bolt Torque 18 ft. lbs. (24 Nm) 6.17 BRAKES REAR CALIPER SERVICE 2. Remove the caliper slide bolts (B), mounting bracket (C), and brake pads (D). Caliper Removal B 1. Clean caliper area before removal. 2. Using a flare nut wrench, remove the brake line (A). Place a container to catch brake fluid draining from brake line. D A C A 3. Remove the outside dust boot (E). B 3. E Remove the caliper mounting bolts (B) and remove the caliper assembly from the caliper mount. Caliper Disassembly 4. Remove the piston and seal (F). F A 1. Remove the c-clips (A) from the caliper sliding bolts. 6.18 RepairPro Service Manual BRAKES 5. Remove the caliper body bolts (G). Pull the caliper bodies apart (if necessary). 2. Inspect Piston G 6. Clean the caliper body, piston, and retaining bracket with brake cleaner or alcohol. Inspect piston for nicks, scratches, wear or damage. Replace if damaged or worn. 3. Inspect the brake disc and pads as outlined for brake pad replacement this section. Caliper Inspection Caliper Assembly 1. 1. Inspect caliper body bore and o-rings for nicks, scratches or wear. Measure bore for roundness. Replace if damage is evident. Reassemble the two caliper halves if previously disassembled. Torque the caliper body bolts to 18 ft.lbs. (24 Nm). 18 ft.-lb. (24Nm) O-rings NOTE: body. Be sure to clean seal grooves in caliper 2. Install new O–ring (A) in the caliper body. Install the dust boot over the caliper and seat the dust boot into caliper groove. Be sure groove is clean and free of residue or brakes may drag. B A 6.19 6 BRAKES 3. Coat piston and inside of caliper body with clean DOT 3 or DOT 4 Brake Fluid. Install piston with a twisting motion while pushing inward. Piston should slide in and out of bore smoothly, with light resistance. NOTE: Be sure that the Oring does not bind when installing the piston. 4. Seat the dust boot securely onto the caliper body. 5. Install the caliper mount (C), brake pads (D), caliper slide bolts (E), and c-clips (F). REAR BRAKE PAD Pad Removal 1. Loosen both bolts and remove the rear brake mount bolt. Tip the caliper and re-torque the remaining brake mount bolt. This will allow access to the upper caliper slide bolt. 2. Loosen the caliper slide bolts with an Allen wrench before you remove the brake caliper. 3. Remove caliper mounting bolts and lift caliper off of disc. C D F 6. E Torque the caliper slide bolts (E) to 33 ft.lbs. (45 Nm). NOTE: When removing caliper, be careful not to damage brake line. Support caliper so as not to kink or bend brake line. 6.20 RepairPro Service Manual BRAKES 4. With pads installed, push caliper piston into caliper bore (A) slowly using a C–clamp (B) or locking pliers. NOTE: Brake fluid will be forced through compensating port into master cylinder fluid reservoir when piston is pushed back into caliper. Remove excess fluid from reservoir as required. 7. Measure the thickness of the pad material. Replace pads if worn beyond the service limit. A B 5. Brake Pad Thickness New: .298” / 7.6 mm Service Limit: .180” / 4.6 mm Remove the c-clips (C) on the ends of the caliper slide bolt. Pad Installation 1. Install new pads (A) in caliper body. Slide the caliper slide bolts (B) into the caliper and hand-tighten. C 6. Remove caliper slide bolts (D) and brake pads (E). D B 2. E A Install the caliper assembly over the brake disc and onto the caliper mount. Tip the caliper forward and install only the forward bolt. This will allow both slide bolts to be torqued to specification. TIP: Use a block or wedge to keep the caliper stationary while tightening the slide bolts. Brake Caliper Mounting Bolt Torque: 18 ft. lbs. (24 Nm) 6.21 6 BRAKES 3. Torque the caliper slide bolts to 33 ft.lbs. (45 Nm). 33 ft.-lb. (45Nm) NOTE: BRAKE BURNISHING: It is recommended that a burnishing procedure be performed after installation of new brake pads to extend service life and reduce noise. Start machine and slowly increase speed to 30 mph. Gradually apply brakes to stop machine. Repeat this procedure 10 times, allowing brakes to cool sufficiently after each run. REAR BRAKE DISC Disc Inspection 1. 4. Visually inspect disc for scoring, scratches, or gouges. Replace the disc if any deep scratches are evident. Install the caliper mounting bolts and torque both bolts to 18 ft. lbs. (24 Nm). Rear Brake Disc Measure Thickness 2. 18 ft. lbs. (24 Nm) 5. Install the c-clips (C) onto the ends of the caliper slide bolts. Use a 0–1” micrometer and measure disc thickness at 8 different points around perimeter of disc. Replace disc if worn beyond service limit. Brake Disc Thickness New: .158” (4.013 mm) Service Limit: .140” / 3.556 mm Brake Disc Thickness Variance Service Limit: .002” (.051 mm) (difference between measurements) C 6. Slowly pump the brake levers until pressure has been built up. Maintain at least 1/2” (12.7 mm) of brake fluid in the reservoir to prevent air from entering the master cylinder. Auxiliary Brake Master Cylinder Fluid Level Between MIN and MAX lines 6.22 3. Mount dial indicator and measure disc runout. Replace the disc if runout exceeds specifications. Brake Disc Runout Service Limit: .010” (.25 mm) RepairPro Service Manual BRAKES Disc Removal 7. Remove brake disc mounting bolts (4). 8. Lift and rotate disc, slipping it over the hub assembly and off the driveshaft, exiting the frame from the side. 1. 2. With ATV on the ground, loosen wheel nuts and hub nuts. Safely lift and support the rear of the ATV under the main frame. 3. Remove right rear wheel and hub. 4. Remove rear caliper and secure out of the way. NOTE: Do not allow the caliper to hang by the brake line. Brake line damage may result. 5. Remove right upper carrier bolt and secure upper a-arm out of the way. Disc Replacement 1. 2. 6. Tilt right hub carrier outward while pulling rear CV shaft end from carrier assembly. 3. 4. 5. Install disc, slipping it over the over the drive shaft and hub assembly. Disc mounting holes will be on the inside face of the hub assembly for correct installation. Install brake disc mounting bolts. Torque mounting bolts to 18 ft.lbs. (24 Nm). Install CV shaft into hub carrier. Install upper a-arm, bolt and nut on to hub carrier. Torque mounting bolt to 30 ft.lbs. (40.6 Nm). Install wheel hub, domed washer and nut (dome of washer facing out). Torque to 90 ft.lbs. (122 Nm). Install cotter pin. 6.23 6 BRAKES TROUBLESHOOTING Brakes Squeal • Dirty/contaminated friction pads • Improper alignment • Worn disc • Worn disc splines • Glazed brake pads Poor Brake Performance • Air in system • Water in system (brake fluid contaminated) • Caliper/disc misaligned • Caliper dirty or damaged • Brake line damaged or lining ruptured • Worn disc and/or friction pads • Incorrectly adjusted lever • Incorrectly adjusted stationary pad • Worn or damaged master cylinder or components • Improper clearance between lever and switch Lever Vibration • Disc damaged • Disc worn (runout or thickness variance exceeds service limit) • Caliper overheats (Brakes Drag) • Compensating port plugged • Pad clearance set incorrectly • Auxiliary brake pedal incorrectly adjusted • Brake lever or pedal binding or unable to return fully • Parking brake left on • Residue build up under caliper seals • Operator riding brakes Brakes Lock • Alignment of caliper to disc • Fluid overfill of the reservoir • Stuck caliper piston 6.24 RepairPro Service Manual ELECTRICAL CHAPTER 7 ELECTRICAL GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 ELECTRICAL SERVICE NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 TIMING CHECK PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 LIGHTING AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 NEUTRAL / REVERSE POSITION INDICATOR SWITCH TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 HEADLIGHT LAMP REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 HEADLAMP SWITCH TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 HEADLIGHT HOUSING REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 HEADLIGHT ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 TAILLIGHT / BRAKELIGHT LAMP REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 CLUTCH SWITCH TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 INDICATOR LAMP REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 TETHER SWITCH TEST (ACCESSORY OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6 ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6 ETC OPERATION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6 IGNITION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 IGNITION SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 CIRCUIT BREAKERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 CRANKING OUTPUT TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 FLYWHEEL IDENTIFICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8 DC / CDI IGNITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8 IGNITION SYSTEM TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9 COMPONENTS OF DC / CDI IGNITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10 COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11 FAN CONTROL CIRCUIT OPERATION / TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11 COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR TEST (HOT LIGHT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11 FAN CONTROL SWITCH BYPASS TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11 COOLANT FAN CONTROL SWITCH OPERATION TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12 FAN MOTOR CURRENT DRAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12 7 CHARGING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12 CURRENT DRAW – KEY OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12 CHARGING SYSTEM “BREAK EVEN” TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13 ALTERNATOR TESTS (CHARGING SYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13 CHARGING SYSTEM TESTING FLOW CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.14 BATTERY SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15 BATTERY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15 BATTERY INSPECTION / REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15 BATTERY TERMINALS / BOLTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.16 BATTERY TESTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.16 OCV – OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.16 LOAD TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.16 OFF SEASON STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.16 CHARGING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17 STARTING SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17 STARTER SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17 CLUTCH SWITCH TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18 NEUTRAL START DIODE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18 STARTER VOLTAGE DROP TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18 STARTER MOTOR DISASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18 BRUSH INSPECTION / REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.19 ARMATURE TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.19 STARTER REASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.20 STARTER ONE-WAY CLUTCH INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.20 STARTER SYSTEM TESTING FLOW CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21 7.1 ELECTRICAL GENERAL INFORMATION Timing Check Procedure Special Tools 1. PART NUMBER TOOL DESCRIPTION PV-43568 Fluke™ 77 Digital Multimeter 2870630 Timing Light 2870836 Battery Hydrometer 2871745 Static Timing Light Harness The ignition timing inspection hole is located in the starter / magneto housing. Remove the check plug. NOTE: Do not allow the engine to warm up. The timing may retard approximately 2° when the engine is warm. The ignition timing marks are stamped on the outer diameter of the flywheel. Ignition timing must be inspected with the engine at room temperature (68° F / 20° C) to obtain the most accurate reading. Electrical Service Notes 2. With the transmission in neutral, start the engine and set engine speed to 3500 ± 50 RPM. Keep the following notes in mind when diagnosing an electrical problem. 3. Direct the timing light at the ignition timing check hole and check the ignition timing. • Refer to wiring diagram for stator and electrical component resistance specifications. • When measuring resistance of a component that has a resistance value under 10 Ohms, remember to subtract meter lead resistance from the reading. Connect the leads together and record the resistance. The resistance of the component is equal to tested value minus the lead resistance. If the ignition timing is not within the specified range, test ignition components for proper function. Ignition timing is non-adjustable. • Become familiar with the operation of your meter. Be sure leads are in the proper jack for the test being performed (i.e. 10A jack for current readings). Refer to the Owner’s Manual included with your meter for more information. • Voltage, amperage, and resistance values included in this manual are obtained with a Fluke™ 77 Digital Multimeter (PV-43568). This meter is used for when diagnosing electrical problems. Readings obtained with other meters may differ. • Pay attention to the prefix on the multimeter reading (K, M, etc.) and the position of the decimal point. Timing Inspection Hole Ignition Timing: Max 30o @ 3500 RPM TDC Case Mark • For resistance readings, isolate the component to be tested. Disconnect it from the wiring harness or power supply. • Ignition timing is non-adjustable. TDC Line (Left of the “T”) 7.2 RepairPro Service Manual ELECTRICAL LIGHTING AND CONTROLS 3. Neutral / Reverse Position Indicator Switch Test Apply dielectric grease to the light bulb socket before installing the new bulb. Install the replacement bulb into headlight housing and rotate firmly. NOTE: The bulb must be positioned so the harness installs into the lamp at the outer side. 4. Reinstall the connector to the back of the headlight. Headlamp Switch Test A B Probe the headlamp plug wires (Brown and Yellow) at back of connector. Turn headlights on. Test for battery voltage across the connections. RED • Low Beam - Brown and Yellow BLK • High Beam - Brown and Green 1. Shift the transmission into 1st gear. The ohm meter should show no continuity or OL when testing at points A and B. If no current is found, test for bad connections, switches, or broken wiring. Refer to the wire diagram for harness routing and connections. 2. Check for continuity at test points A and B while in reverse and neutral. You should have continuity on one of the wires for each test at points A and B. Headlight Housing Replacement NOTE: If there is no continuity at either of the wire connections with the transmission in neutral or reverse, remove the switch and inspect the shift drum contact pin and spring for proper function. If no problems are found, inspect the wiring, bulb, and harness connection. CAUTION Do not service while headlight is hot. Serious burns may result. Protect lamp during install. 1. Remove the wire harness connector from the headlights. Headlight Lamp Replacement 2. Remove the front cab. Position the cab upside down on a soft protective surface to prevent scratching. 1. Remove the wire harness connector from the back of the headlight. 3. Remove the small adjuster bracket (1) and install it on the new lamp. 2. On the left headlamp, grasp the bulb housing and turn it counterclockwise and pull outward (1) to remove the bulb. On the right headlamp, turn the bulb housing clockwise and pull outward (2) to remove the bulb. 2 2 1 1 4. Remove the large pivot bracket (2) and remove the headlamp. 5. Install the new headlamp by inserting the outboard pivot pin in the hole of the mounting tab on the cab. 7.3 7 ELECTRICAL 6. Install the adjuster bracket onto the inboard pivot pin of the headlamp. 7. Adjust for approximately 1/16” clearance between the bracket and the edge of the headlight. Tighten the mounting screws. 5. IMPORTANT: Be sure the bracket is 90 degrees to the pivot pin so the lamp can move freely. 8. Install the adjusting screw, leaving it loose so the headlight can be adjusted. 9. Reinstall the front cab and connect the wire harness to the headlamp. Loosen the pivot screw (1) and adjust the beam to the desired position. 1 10. Adjust the lamps as needed, then tighten the adjuster screw. Headlight Adjustment 6. The headlight beam can be adjusted to varied positions by using the following procedures: Taillight / Brakelight Lamp Replacement 1. Place the vehicle on a level surface with the headlight approximately 25’ (7.6 m) from a wall. Tighten the screw and torque to 27 in. lbs. (3 Nm). If the taillight / brakelight does not work the LED lamp assembly may need to be replaced. 25’ (7.6m) Lamp Center Height 2” (5.1cm) 2. Measure the distance from the floor to the center of the headlight and make a mark on the wall at the same height 3. Start the engine and turn the headlight switch to high beam. 4. Observe headlight aim. The most intense part of the headlight beam should be aimed 2” (5.1 cm) below the mark placed on the wall in Step 2. Pinout Detail TAIL GROUND BRAKE NOTE: Rider weight must be included on the seat. On machines with separate low beam lights, the drop should be 8” (20.3 cm) in 25’ from the center of the low beam lamp. 1. From the rear of the taillight remove two screws holding the assembly in place. 2. Remove the assembly and replace it with the recommended lamp. Apply dielectric grease (PN 2871329) to the new contacts. 3. Reinstall the assembly as in step 1. 4. Test the taillight / brakelight to see it is working. 7.4 RepairPro Service Manual ELECTRICAL Brake Light Switch Tests Clutch Switch Test Foot Brake Switch 1. Disconnect wire harness from switch. 2. Connect an ohmmeter across switch contacts. The circuit should have an open line or infinity reading. 1. 2. Disconnect wire harness from switch. Connect an ohmmeter across switch contacts. The circuit should have an open line or infinity reading. 3. Apply foot brake and check for continuity between switch contacts. Replace switch if there is no continuity or greater than .5 ohms resistance when the brake is applied with slight pressure. Hand Brake Switch 1. Disconnect wire harness from switch. 3. Apply the clutch lever and check for continuity between switch contacts. Replace switch if there is no continuity or greater than .5 ohms resistance when the lever is applied with slight pressure. Indicator Lamp Replacement 1. Gain access to the lamps by disconnecting the front cab harness and removing the fasteners that attach the front cab to the ATV. 2. Disconnect wire harness connector at indicator panel. Remove indicator lamp from the panel by turning the holder 1/4 turn with a screw driver (A). A 2. B Connect an ohmmeter across switch contacts. The circuit should have an open line or infinity reading. 3. Apply front brake lever and check for continuity between switch contacts. Replace switch if there is no continuity or greater than .5 ohms resistance when the brake is applied with slight pressure. 3. Push a new lamp into holder assembly and insert into the indicator panel. Turn holder 1/4 turn to lock in place (B). Reconnect wiring and reattach the cab assembly. 7.5 7 ELECTRICAL Tether Switch Test (Accessory Option) ETC Operation Test 1. Remove throttle block cover by carefully releasing all tabs around edge of cover. Disconnect wire harness from switch. Place transmission in neutral and apply parking brake. Start engine and open throttle lever slightly until engine RPM is just above idle speed. 2. Connect an ohmmeter across switch contacts. The circuit should have an open line or infinity reading. 3. Pull tether boot from switch and check for continuity between switch contacts. Replace switch if there is no continuity or greater than .5 ohms resistance. Hold throttle cable with fingers at point “A” as shown below and release throttle lever. If the ETC system is functioning properly, the engine will lose spark and stop. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Switch (Composite Throttle Housing) ETC switch contacts are closed in a fault Switch contacts are open condition (throttle cable during normal operation slack) Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Switch The Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system is designed to stop the engine of an ATV in the event of a mechanical problem with the throttle mechanism. The ETC switch is mounted independently of the throttle actuator lever inside the throttle block assembly. This is a normally closed switch, and is held in the open position (contacts are separated (as shown below)) by throttle cable tension. The contacts are “open” during normal operation regardless of throttle lever position. In the event of a mechanical problem in the throttle mechanism (cable tension is lost), the switch contacts close, connecting the CDI black wire to ground, which prevents ignition spark. This is the same as turning the key or engine stop switch “OFF”. A Test the ETC switch at the harness connector. NOTE: Adjust throttle cable freeplay (ETC switch) and make sure throttle mechanism is functioning properly before testing the switch. Refer to Maintenance Chapter 2 for cable adjustment procedure. 7.6 RepairPro Service Manual ELECTRICAL IGNITION SYSTEM Circuit Breakers Ignition System Troubleshooting The circuit breaker panel is located underneath the front cab. Access can be gained by removing the cover. Removal of front cab may be required for better access. No Spark, Weak or Intermittent Spark • No 12 volt power or ground to CDI • Spark plug gap incorrect • Fouled spark plug • Faulty spark plug cap or poor connection to high tension lead • Related wiring loose, disconnected, shorted, or corroded 15 Amp - System Main 10 Amp - Fan 5 Amp - CDI • Engine Stop switch or ignition switch faulty • ETC switch misadjusted or faulty Cranking Output Tests • Poor ignition coil ground (e.g. coil mount loose or corroded) The following tests will measure the amount of output directly from each component. • Faulty stator (measure resistance of all ignition related windings) Test output from the CDI and pulse (trigger) coil and compare to the table. The following measurements are obtained when cranking the engine with the electric starter and with the spark plug installed. The starter system must be in good condition and the battery fully charged. • Incorrect wiring (inspect color coding in connectors etc) 200 Watt 4 Stroke DC/CDI Ignition • Faulty ignition coil winding (measure resistance of primary and secondary) • Worn magneto (RH) end Crankshaft bearings Test Connect Meter Wires To: • Sheared flywheel key • Flywheel loose or damaged • Excessive crankshaft runout on magneto (RH) end – should not exceed .005” Pulse (Trigger) White / Red and White CDI Output Reading (Without Peak Reading Volt meter) 1.4 - 2.0 DCV White / Blue and Ground 200 - 400 DCV • Faulty CDI module 7.7 7 ELECTRICAL Flywheel Identification A Flywheel Identification Stamp Location The flywheel can be identified by the casting marks in location A. Refer to “I.D.” location in chart below. Engine Application ES50PL Type Stamp Comment I.D. Stamp External Trigger IJ09 DC / CDI Ignition K1805 DC / CDI Ignition Some of the advantages of DC ignition are: • Stronger, more consistent spark at low rpm for better performance • Easier starts • Simpler component design for ease trouble shooting and maintenance Operation Overview: The DC/CDI system relies on battery power for ignition function. Instead of generating DC voltage via magnetic induction, a 12 volt DC current is supplied directly to the CDI unit from the battery. At the CDI, the supplied 12 volt DC current charges an internal capacitor to build up the initial ignition charge. A small AC signal from the Pulse coil closes a thyristor (located in the CDI) at a point pre-determined in the crankshaft rotation by magnets on the flywheel’s outer diameter. This signal releases the electrical charge which saturates the coil for ignition. DC/CDI systems have the ability to ignite with as little as 6 volts of power. NOTE: DC/CDI systems and components are not interchangeable with any other system. Typical Timing Pattern Shown 7.8 RepairPro Service Manual ELECTRICAL Ignition System Testing Whenever troubleshooting an electrical problem you should first check all terminal connections to be sure they are clean and tight. Also be sure that colors match when wires are connected. Use the following pages as a guide for troubleshooting. The resistance values are also given on the specification pages. Condition: No spark or intermittent spark. Verify 12 Volt DC power is present on the red wire to CDI. Replace Spark Plug. Disconnect the black wire from the 4 wire connector attached to the CDI module to isolate the ignition from the kill system. Verify the CDI has a good ground path (brown) for operation. -Test the ignition switch, engine stop switch, and speed limiter circuit for short to ground. - Check connectors for moisture, wire color matching or corrosion. Yes Does it have spark? No Disconnect the pulse (trigger) coil connector from the CDI module. Measure the resistance of the trigger coil. Check reverse signal coil. Refer to the exploded view or the wiring schematic for meter connections and specifications. Compare results to the specifications. Inspect connectors, wiring and grounds to the component in question. Replace the component if a wiring problem cannot be found. No Is it within specification? Yes Check coil ground connection between engine and coil mount using an ohmmeter. The coil mount should have good continuity to ground on the engine (0 - .3 Ω). 7 Clean coil mounting area. Repair ground wire connections. No Yes Disconnect and check the secondary coil. Resistance values should be: Primary Side - Primary wire tab to engine ground (on coil mount or engine): .3 to .5 Ohms Secondary Side High Tension wire to engine ground Cap installed - 11,300Ω Cap removed - 6300Ω No Replace the ignition coil. Are these values within specs? Yes If all of the above tests are within specifications, and all grounds, connections, and wire color coding have been inspected, perform voltage output tests on following page or replace the CDI module. 7.9 ELECTRICAL Components of DC / CDI Ignition Note: DC/CDI components are not compatible with any other type of ignition. Refer To Wiring Diagrams For Specified Stator Coil Resistance Primary Resistance Ω High Tension Lead Meter Ignition Kill Wire (Black) .3 Ω 12 Volt DC Supply Wire (Red) Ignition Coil Resistor Cap Ω Meter CDI Box 11.3kΩ Secondary Resistance Ω Meter Ω Reverse Signal Coil Meter (Located in stator) 190Ω .089Ω Starter Solenoid Pulse Coil (Trigger) Air Gap: .016 - .030” (.4 - .75mm) Stator Refer to Page 7.8 for Flywheel identification. One way starter clutch Starter Drive gear 7.10 RepairPro Service Manual ELECTRICAL COOLING SYSTEM Coolant Temperature Sensor Test (Hot Light) Fan Control Circuit Operation / Testing With the ignition switch (and engine stop switch) “ON”, power is delivered to the hot light via the Red / White wire. The Blue / White wire (ground) out of the light socket is connected to the coolant temperature switch on the cylinder head. In normal operating conditions, the temperature switch is non–conductive (open). If engine coolant reaches the specified temperature, the switch becomes conductive completing the ground path for the light. The fan switch is located on the radiator. Power is supplied to the fan switch via the Red / Black wire when the ignition key is “ON”. When the fan switch reaches the specified temperature, it becomes conductive and sends power to the fan motor through to the Orange / Black wire. The ground path for the fan motor is through the Brown harness wire. With engine cold, disconnect lead and measure resistance of sensor between connector terminal and ground. There should be no continuity or very high resistance (mega-ohms). Hot Light On 221o F (105o C) Fan Control Switch Bypass Test CAUTION Keep hands away from fan blades during this procedure. Serious personal injury could result. The fan switch may not function or operation may be delayed if coolant level is low or if air is trapped in the cooling system. Verify the cooling system is full and purged of air. Refer to Maintenance Chapter 2 for cooling system information. 1. Disconnect harness from fan switch on radiator. 2. Place a jumper wire between the Red / Blk and Org / Blk wires in the connector. 3. With the parking brake on, turn the ignition key (and engine stop switch) “ON”. The fan should start running. 4. If the fan runs with the jumper wire installed, check the fan control switch and connector terminals. If the fan does not run or runs slowly with the jumper wire installed, check the fan motor wiring, ground, and motor condition (refer to Fan Motor Current Draw). Repair or replace as necessary. 7.11 7 ELECTRICAL Coolant Fan Control Switch Operation Test 1. Place switch in a liquid bath and submerse it to the base of the threads. Do not allow threads to contact container or an inaccurate reading will result. 2. Heat the liquid slowly and monitor the temperature with a thermometer or Fluke™ meter pyrometer. The switch should be closed (conductive) at the “ON” temperature indicated in the chart, and stay conductive until the “OFF” temperature is reached. 6. During start-up, the amperage should peak then decline rapidly. If the motor continues to draw more amperage than the fan circuit breaker rating during start-up, replace the motor. 7. If the fan motor draws more than 6.5 Amps during continual running, check for debris blocking the fan, or replace the motor. Fan Motor Current Draw: Less Than 6.5 Amps Refer To Parts Manual For Fan Switch Application Fan Switch Type Off / On Thermistor Continuity (On) o o 180 F (82 C) ± 3 oF No Continuity (Off) o CHARGING SYSTEM Current Draw – Key Off o 150 F (65 C) ± 8 oF Fan Motor Current Draw A current draw test will provide a good indication of fan motor condition. A worn or damaged fan motor will draw more current, which causes a reduction in blade speed and reduced cooling. 1. Turn key off. Disconnect harness from fan switch on radiator. 2. Place a jumper wire between the Red / Blk and Org / Blk wires in the fan switch connector. 3. Disconnect the fan and place a jumper wire between the brown wires in the connectors. This will provide a ground path to the fan. Use caution as to not damage the wire terminals. 4. Place a DC ammeter in series as shown in the Illustration. Verify fan blade is free to rotate. CAUTION Do not connect or disconnect the battery cable or ammeter with the engine running. Damage will occur to electrical components. Connect an ammeter in series with the negative battery cable. Check for current draw with the key off. If the draw is excessive, loads should be disconnected from the system one by one until the draw is eliminated. Check component wiring as well as the component for partial shorts to ground to eliminate the draw. Current Draw Inspection Key Off Connect ammeter leads to each service tool terminal Current Draw - Key Off: Maximum of .01 DCA (10mA) Connect BRN Wires 5. Turn ignition key and engine stop switch to “RUN” position. Read the current draw on ammeter with fan running. 7.12 RepairPro Service Manual ELECTRICAL Charging System “Break Even” Test CAUTION Do not allow the battery cables to become disconnected with the engine running. Follow the steps below as outlined to reduce the chance of damage to electrical The “break even” point of the charging system is the point at which the alternator overcomes all system loads (lights, etc.) and begins to charge the battery. Depending on battery condition and system load, the break even point may vary slightly. The battery should be fully charged before performing this test. WARNING Never start the engine with an ammeter connected in series. Damage to the meter or meter fuse will result. Do not run test for extended period of time. Do not run test with 1. Connect a tachometer to the engine. 2. Using an inductive amperage metering device, (set to DC amps) connect to the negative battery cable. 3. With engine off and the key, kill switch, and lights in the “ON” position, the ammeter should read negative amps (battery discharge). Reverse meter lead if a positive reading is indicated. 4. Shift transmission into Park and start the engine. With the engine running at idle, observe meter readings. 5. Increase engine RPM while observing ammeter and tachometer. 6. Note RPM at which the battery starts to charge (ammeter indication is positive). 7. With lights and other electrical loads off, the “break even” point should occur at approximately 1500 RPM or lower. 8. With the engine running, turn the lights on and engage parking brake lock to keep brake light on. 9. Repeat test, observing ammeter and tachometer. With lights on, charging should occur at or below 2000 RPM. Alternator Tests (Charging System) Three tests can be performed using a multimeter to determine the condition of the stator (alternator). TEST 1: Resistance Value of Each Stator Leg 1. Measure the resistance value of each of the three stator legs: Y1 to Y2, Y1 to Y3, and Y2 to Y3. Each should measure 0.49 ohms. NOTE: If there are any significant variations in ohms readings between the three legs; it is an indication that one of the three stator legs may be weak or failed. TEST 2: Resistance Value of Stator Leg to Ground 1. Measure the resistance value of each of the stator legs to ground: Y1 to Ground, Y2 to Ground, Y3 to Ground. NOTE: Any measurement other than Infinity (open) will indicate a failed or shorted stator leg. TEST 3: Measure AC Voltage Output of Each Stator Leg at Charging RPM with a Voltmeter set to Volts AC. 1. Set the voltmeter to read AC Voltage. 2. Start the engine and let it idle. 3. Separately test each ’leg’ of the stator by connecting the meter leads to the wires leading from the alternator (Y1 to Y2, Y1 to Y3, Y2 to Y3). Alternator Output Readings should be no less than 30-40V AC above 2000 RPM on each ’leg’. NOTE: If stator leg AC output varies significantly from the specified value, the stator may need to be replaced. 7.13 7 ELECTRICAL Charging System Testing Flow Chart Whenever charging system problems are suspected, proceed with the following system check. Using a multitester set on D.C. volts, measure the battery open circuit voltage (See page 7.12). It should be 12.5 volts or more. Is it? Remove the battery and properly service. Reinstall the fully charged battery or a fully charged shop battery. No Yes Meter Setting: DC Volts With the transmission in neutral, start the engine and increase RPM to between 3000 and 4000. Read battery voltage with the multitester. Readings should increase to between 13.0 and 14.6 V D.C. Are they? Check Key off Current Draw. Yes No Check for owner modification, and discuss operating habits. The battery will continually discharge if operated below the “Break Even” RPM. Continued problems would call for battery inspection. Meter Setting: DC Amps Perform system “Break Even Amperage” test outlined on Page 7.13. Yes Does charging occur as specified? No Ohm stator (Y) wires. If failed, replace, if good, continue with alternator output test. Meter Setting: AC Volts Disconnect the Yellow wires from the regulator/rectifier. Using a multitester, perform an Alternator Output Test. See test procedure on Page 7.13 for procedure. Does output meet specification? No Inspect the wiring harness between the panel and the stator for damage. If no damage is found, remove the recoil and flywheel. Inspect the flywheel magnets, stator coils and stator wire harness for damage. Repair or replace any damaged components. Yes Meter Setting: DC Volts Reconnect the alternator wires. Note: Red wire must be connected to harness. Battery voltage must be present on red wire terminal on harness side of voltage regulator connector. No Check regulator/rectifier connections and ground, battery connections, circuit breaker and connecting wires. Repair or replace faulty wiring or components. Is it? Yes If all of the previous tests indicate a good condition, but the charging voltage does not rise above battery voltage at the connector or wire harness, replace the voltage regulator. 7.14 RepairPro Service Manual ELECTRICAL BATTERY SERVICE Battery Inspection / Removal Battery Maintenance The battery is located under the front cab at the front of the ATV. Removal of the front cab assembly is required to access the battery. Refer to Chapter 5 for front cab removal. WARNING Battery electrolyte is poisonous. It contains sulfuric acid. Serious burns can result from contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Antidote: External: Flush with water. Internal: Drink large quantities of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten egg, or vegetable oil. Call physician immediately. Battery Location Eyes: Flush with water for 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. To remove the battery: Batteries produce explosive gases. Keep sparks, flame, cigarettes etc. away. Ventilate when charging or using in an enclosed space. Always shield eyes when working near batteries. KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN. 1. Remove the front cab. 2. Disconnect holder strap. 3. Disconnect battery negative (–) (black) cable first, followed by the positive (+) (red) cables. CAUTION All Outlaw ATV batteries are Maintenance-Free design and construction. Before placing the battery into service, check the battery condition and charge accordingly. Use of Conventional Lead-Acid batteries is not recommended. New Batteries: Batteries must be fully charged before use or battery life will be reduced by 10–30% of full potential. Charge battery for 3-5 hours at a current equivalent of 1/10 of the battery’s rated amp/hour capacity (i.e. 9 amp hr x .10 = .9 amp charging). Do not use the alternator to charge a new battery. Maintenance-Free batteries are sealed at the factory. The use of lead-calcium instead of lead-antimony allows the battery acid to be fully absorbed by the plates. Therefore, a Maintenance-Free battery case is opaque and the sealing caps are not removable, since there is no need to check electrolyte level. NEVER attempt to add electrolyte or water to a Maintenance-Free battery. Doing so will damage the case and shorten the life of the battery. To reduce the chance of sparks: Whenever removing the battery, disconnect the negative (black) cable first. When reinstalling the battery, install the negative cable last. 4. Remove the battery. 5. Clean battery cables and terminals with a stiff wire brush. Corrosion can be removed using a solution of one cup water and one tablespoon baking soda. Rinse well with clean water and dry thoroughly. Test battery for condition and charge accordingly. 6. Reinstall battery, attaching positive (+) (red) cable first and then the negative (–) (black) cable. 7. Coat terminals and bolt threads with Dielectric Grease (PN 2871329). 8. Reinstall the holder strap. 9. Reinstall the battery caps. 10. Charge battery at 1/10 of its amp/hour rating. Example: 1/ 10 of 14 amp battery = 1.4 amp 11. Reinstall the battery after testing. 7.15 7 ELECTRICAL Battery Terminals / Bolts Load Test Use Polaris corrosion resistant Dielectric Grease (PN 2871329) on battery bolts. Battery Testing Whenever a service complaint is related to either the starting or charging systems, the battery should be checked first. Following are tests which can easily be made on a maintenancefree battery to determine its condition: The OCV Test and Load Test. OCV – Open Circuit Voltage Test Battery voltage should be checked with a digital multitester. Readings of 12.6 volts or less require further battery testing and charging. See charts and Load Test. To perform an open circuit voltage test, set the digital meter to DC volts and place the tester leads on each battery terminal. Minimum voltage should be 12.4 to 12.7 VDC for a known good battery. OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE State of Charge Maintenance Free 100% Charged 12.6 V 75% Charged 12.4 V 50% Charged 12.1 V 25% Charged 11.9 V 0% Charged less than 11.9 V Self Discharge vs. Temperature Temperature Days to 0% Charged 104 F 300 77 F 600 32 F 950 CAUTION To prevent shock or component damage, remove spark plug high tension leads and connect securely to engine ground before proceeding. NOTE: This test can only be performed on machines with electric starters. This test cannot be performed with an engine or starting system that is not working properly. A battery may indicate a full charge condition in the OCV test and the specific gravity test, but still may not have the storage capacity necessary to properly function in the electrical system. For this reason, a battery capacity or load test should be conducted whenever poor battery performance is encountered. To perform this test, hook a multi-tester to the battery in the same manner as was done in the OCV test. The reading should be 12.6 volts or greater. Engage the starter and observe the battery voltage while cranking the engine. Continue the test for 15 seconds. During cranking the observed voltage should not drop below 9.5 volts. If the beginning voltage is 12.6 volts or higher and the cranking voltage drops below 9.5 volts during the test, replace the battery and re-test. Continued low cranking voltage with a known good battery may indicate excess current draw from one or more of the starting components. Off Season Storage To prevent battery damage during extended periods of non–use, the following basic battery maintenance items must be performed: • Remove the battery from the machine and wash the case and battery tray with a mild solution of baking soda and water. Rinse with lots of fresh water after cleaning. NOTE: Do not get any of the baking soda into the battery or the acid will be neutralized. • Using a wire brush or knife, remove any corrosion from the cables and terminals. • Never add water to a sealed maintenance free battery. • Charge at a rate no greater than 1/10 of the battery’s amp/hr capacity until the open circuit voltage is 12.9 V or greater. • Store the battery either in the machine with the cables disconnected, or store in a cool place. 7.16 RepairPro Service Manual ELECTRICAL Charging Procedure STARTING SYSTEM NOTE: Remote charging terminals have been provided to allow for battery charging without removal of the front cab. Starter System Troubleshooting 1. 2. 3. Starter Motor Does Not Turn Attach the Positive battery charging cable to the Red Charge Terminal (A); which is directly connected to the positive battery terminal. It is located just above the front right shock mount. • Battery discharged. Low specific gravity Attach the Negative battery charging cable to the free end of the Black Cable (B) under the right front cab (which is directly connected to the negative battery terminal). • Related wiring loose, disconnected, or corroded Charge with a charging output no larger than 1/10 of the battery's amp/hr rating. Charge as needed to raise the open circuit voltage to 12.9 V or greater. • Loose or faulty battery cables or corroded connections (see Voltage Drop Tests) • Poor ground connections at battery cable, starter motor or starter solenoid (see Voltage Drop Tests) • Faulty key switch • Faulty kill switch • Faulty neutral diode A • Faulty clutch switch • Faulty starter solenoid or starter motor • Engine problem – seized or binding (Can engine be rotated easily ?) B • NOTE: The Outlaw will not push start or key start if the battery is disconnected or completely dead. Starter Motor Turns Over Slowly 7 • Battery discharged WARNING To avoid the possibility of explosion or sparks, connect positive (red) cable first and negative (black) cable last. • Excessive circuit resistance – poor connections (see Voltage Drop Test) • Engine problem – seized or binding (Can engine be rotated easily?) • Faulty or worn brushes in starter motor • Automatic compression release inoperative Starter Motor Turns – Engine Does Not Rotate • Faulty starter drive/one way clutch • Faulty starter drive gears or starter motor gear • Faulty flywheel gear or loose flywheel • Possible engine damage 7.17 ELECTRICAL Clutch Switch Test Starter Motor Disassembly Refer to “Clutch Switch Test” under the “Lighting and Controls” section of this chapter. Problems with the clutch switch will cause the starter circuit to not operate. Use only electrical contact cleaner to clean starter motor parts. Some solvents may leave a residue or damage internal parts and insulation. Neutral Start Diode Test 1. Note the alignment marks on both ends of the starter motor casing. These marks must align during reassembly. 2. Remove the two bolts, washers, and sealing O–Rings. Inspect O–Rings and replace if damaged. 3. Remove brush terminal end of housing while holding other two sections together. 1. Disconnect diode from harness. 2. Using an ohm meter, test for continuity each way. The diode should only read continuity one direction if it is working properly. 3. Should the diode test good and there is still a problem, check the clutch switch, wiring, and harness connections. Starter Voltage Drop Testing A Voltage Drop Test tests for bad connections. When performing the procedure, you are testing the amount of voltage drop through the connection. A poor or corroded connection will appear as a high voltage reading. Voltage shown on the meter when testing connections should not exceed .1 VDC per connection or component. To perform the test, place the meter on DC volts and place the meter leads across the connection to be tested. Voltage should not exceed .1 DC volts per connection 4. Remove shims from armature shaft. NOTE: All shims must be replaced during reassembly. 7.18 RepairPro Service Manual ELECTRICAL Brush Inspection / Replacement Brush Set 5. Inspect surface of commutator for wear or discoloration. See Steps 3–6 of armature testing on Page 7.20. 6. Install a new carbon brush assembly in the brush housing. NOTE: Be sure that the terminal bolt insulating washer is properly seated in the housing, and the tab on the brush plate engages the notch in the brush plate housing. 1. Using a digital multi-tester, measure the resistance between the cable terminal and the insulated brush. The reading should be .3 ohms or less. 2. Measure the resistance between the cable terminal and brush housing. Make sure the brush is not touching the case. The reading should be infinite. 3. Remove nut, flat washer, large phenolic washer, two small phenolic washers, and O–Ring from brush terminal. Inspect the O–Ring and replace if damaged. 7. Place a wrap of electrical tape on the threads of the terminal bolt to prevent O–Ring damage during reinstallation. 8. Install the O–Ring over the bolt. Make sure the O–ring is fully seated. 9. Remove the electrical tape and reinstall the two small phenolic washers, the large phenolic washer, flat washer, and nut. Armature Testing 1. Remove armature from starter casing. Note order of shims on drive end for reassembly. 2. Inspect surface of commutator. Replace if excessively worn or damaged. 7 4. Remove brush plate and brushes. Measure length of brushes and replace if worn past the service limit. Replace springs if they are discolored or have inadequate tension. Brush length 5/16” (.8 cm) Brush Length Service Limit: 5/16” (.8 cm) 7.19 ELECTRICAL 3. 4. 5. Using a digital multitester, measure the resistance between each of the commutator segments. The reading should be .3 ohms or less. Measure the resistance between each commutator segment and the armature shaft. The reading should be infinite (no continuity). 6. Install O–Ring on other end of field magnet casing. Make sure it is in good condition and not twisted on the case. 7. Align casing marks and install housing, pushing back brushes while installing shaft in bushing. Starter One-Way Clutch Inspection Check commutator bars for discoloration. Bars discolored in pairs indicate shorted coils, requiring replacement of the starter motor. 6. Place armature in a growler. Turn growler on and position a hacksaw blade or feeler gauge lengthwise 1/8” (.3 cm) above armature coil laminates. Rotate armature 360o. If hacksaw blade is drawn to armature on any pole, the armature is shorted and must be replaced. Flywheel One - way Clutch Starter Reassembly Drive Gear CAUTION 1. 2. 3. 1. Use care when handling starter housing. Do not drop or strike the housing as magnet damage is possible. If magnets are damaged, starter must be replaced. Inspect the drive gear teeth, bearings and thrust surfaces for excessive wear or damage. 2. Inspect the one way drive clutch rollers and springs for excessive wear or damage. Inspect permanent magnets in starter housing. Make sure they are not cracked or separated from housing. Reinstall starter motor housing bolts. Make sure O–Rings are in good condition and seated in groove. Place armature in field magnet casing. 3. Proper function can be determined by rotating the drive gear counterclockwise, which will engage the one-way clutch rollers and turn the flywheel. During engine rotation, there should be no chattering or hanging of the drive gear and one-way clutch. Should this occur, replace one or both components and retest. Refer to Chapter 3 for the proper torque specifications and assembly procedures. 4. Place shims on drive end of armature shaft with phenolic washer outermost on shaft. Engage tabs of stationary washer in drive end housing, holding it in place with a light film of grease. 5. Install case sealing O–Ring. Make sure O–Ring is in good condition and not twisted on the case. Lubricate needle bearing and oil seal with a light film of grease, and install housing, aligning marks. 7.20 RepairPro Service Manual ELECTRICAL Starter System Testing Flow Chart Condition: Starter fails to turn motor. NOTE: Make sure engine crankshaft is free to turn before proceeding with dynamic testing of starter system. A digital multitester must be used for this test. With the tester on the VDC position, place the tester’s black lead on the battery negative and the red lead on the battery positive. No Remove battery and properly service. Install fully charged shop battery to continue test. Reading should be 12.5 VDC or greater. Yes Disconnect White/Red engagement coil wire from the starter solenoid. Connect tester black wire to battery ground. Connect red tester lead to White/ Red harness wire at solenoid.Turn on ignition switch and depress the starter button.Tester should read battery voltage. Yes Voltage Drop Testing No Check voltage on both sides of circuit breaker, ignition switch/engine stop switch and starter button. The voltage on both sides should be the same. NOTE: The ignition switch must be on and the engine switch turned to “RUN”. Check the clutch and neutral safety start circuits, as they supply the ground path for solenoid operation. Replace the defective component(s) or wiring. Test starter solenoid coil by connecting an ohmmeter between the solenoid red wire and the solenoid mounting plate. Resistance should be 3.4Ω. Check solenoid ground path by measuring resistance between mounting plate and battery negative terminal (-). See Page 7.16 for information Reconnect the solenoid. Connect the tester black lead to the battery positive and the red lead to the solenoid end of the battery-to-solenoid wire.Depress starter button. Reading should be less than .1 V D.C. No Clean the battery-to-solenoid cable ends or replace the cables. Yes Connect the black tester lead to solenoid end of battery-to-solenoid cable. Connect red tester lead to solenoid end of solenoid-to-starter cable. Depress starter button. Reading should be less than .1 V D.C. No Replace the starter solenoid. No Clean the solenoid-to-starter cable ends or replace the cable. Yes Connect the black tester lead to solenoid end of the solenoid-to-starter cable. Connect red tester lead to the starter end of the same cable. Depress the starter button. The reading should be less than .1 V D.C. Yes If all of these indicate a good condition, yet the starter still fails to turn, the starter must be removed for static testing and inspection. 7.21 7 ELECTRICAL NOTES 7.22 RepairPro Service Manual A A-Arm Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10 A-Arm, Front Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15 A-Arm, Front Removal and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15 A-Arm, Rear Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17 A-Arm, Rear Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18 A-Arm, Rear Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17 Air Filter Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13 Alternator Output Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13 Anti-Freeze / Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18 Auxiliary Brake, Master Cylinder Fluid Level . . . . . . . . 6.22 B Ball Joint, Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 Battery Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23, 7.17 Battery Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15 Battery Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22, 7.15 Battery Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23 Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.23, 7.15, 7.16 Battery Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.23 Battery Terminal Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.16 Battery Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.16 Battery, Off Season Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.16 Body Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 Boot Burping, Rear Driveshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.22 Boot Inspection, Rear Driveshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21 Brake Burnishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16 Brake Caliper Assembly, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14 Brake Caliper Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 Brake Caliper Inspection, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13 Brake Caliper Installation, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14 Brake Caliper Removal, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12 Brake Caliper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18 Brake Caliper, Rear Mounting Bolt Torque . . . . . . . . . . 6.21 Brake Caliper, Rear Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18 Brake Caliper, Rear, Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19 Brake Caliper, Rear, Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18 Brake Caliper, Rear, Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19 Brake Disc Runout, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17 Brake Disc Runout, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.22 Brake Disc Thickness, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17 Brake Disc Thickness, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.22 Brake Disc, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17 Brake Disc, Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17 Brake Disc, Inspection, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.22 Brake Disc, Mounting Bolt Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17 Brake Disc, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.22 Brake Disc, Removal, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.23 Brake Disc, Replacement / Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17 Brake Disc, Replacement, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.23 Brake Front Pad Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16 Brake Lamp, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 Brake Light Switch Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 Brake Pad Assembly, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16 Brake Pad Thickness, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15 Brake Pad Thickness, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.21 Brake Pads, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15 Brake Pads, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20 Brake Pads, Rear Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.21 Brake Pads, Rear Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20 Brake Pads, Removal, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15 Brake Switch, Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 Brake System, Service Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6 Brakelight Lamp Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 Brakes, Fluid Replacement and Bleeding Procedure . . . . 6.8 Brakes, Hydraulic System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7 Brakes, Inspection and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29 C Cam Timing Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34 Carburetor Draining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11 Carburetor Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Carburetor Pilot Screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12 Carburetor, Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11 Carburetor, Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9 Carburetor, Float Bowl Level Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12 Carburetor, Float Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11 Carburetor, Function and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 Carburetor, Jetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 Carburetor, Needle and Seat Leak Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12 Carburetor, Pilot Screw Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 Carburetor, Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13 Chain Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.21 Chain Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20 Chain, Inspection and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20 Charging System Break Even Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13 Charging System Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.14 Charging System Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.14 Charging System, Alternator Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13 Charging System, Break Even Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13 Charging System, Current Draw-Key Off . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12 Charging System, Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10 Choke Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 Clutch Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19 Clutch Switch Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18 Clutch Switch, Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 Compression Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16, 3.6 Conversion Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11 Coolant Temp. Sensor Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.17 Cooling System Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 Cooling System, Recovery Level Inspection . . . . . . . . . 2.18 Cooling, Fan Control Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11 Cooling, Temperature Sensor Operation/Test . . . . . . . . . 7.11 Crankcase Bearing Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29 Crankcase Bearing Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25 Crankcase Breather Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.14 Cranking Output Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 Crankshaft Removal/Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29 Crankshaft Straightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 IX.1 IX Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.12 CV Joint, Boot Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.29 CV Joint, Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.30 CV Joint, Rear Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.28 CV Joint, Rear Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.28 Cylinder Head Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.35 Cylinder Leakdown Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.16 D Decals, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.31 Decimal Equivalent Size Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.10 Drain Tube, Air Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.14 E E.T.C. Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.13 Electrical Service Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2 Electrical Special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2 Engine Accessible Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.8 Engine Bottom End Disassembly . . . . . . . . 3.17, 3.18, 3.29 Engine Break in Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.9 Engine Designation Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2 Engine Exploded Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.13 Engine Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.9 Engine Installation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.9 Engine Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.10 Engine Mounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.17 Engine Oil Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.10 Engine Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.8 Engine Serial Number Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2 ETC Operation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.6 ETC Switch Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.6 ETC Switch, Operation and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.6 Exhaust, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.16 F Fan Control Bypass Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.11 Fan Control Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.11 Fan Control Switch Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.12 Fan Motor Current Draw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.12 Fan Motor Current Draw Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.12 Front Brake Caliper Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.3 Front Brake System, Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.4 Front Cab, Remove and Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.5 Front Caliper, Piston Bore I.D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.13 Front Hub Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.11 Front Hub, Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.12 Front Hub, Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.12 Front Hub, Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.10 Front Hub, Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.13 Front Hub, Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.11 Front Suspension, Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.14 Fuel Line Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.10 Fuel Pump, Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.13 Fuel Pump, Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.13 Fuel Pump, Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.13 Fuel System Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.10 Fuel System, Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.13 IX.2 Fuel Tank Assembly, Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Fuel Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11 Fuses, See Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 G Gear Position Switch Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Glossary of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12 H Headlamp Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Headlamp Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Headlamp Switch Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Headlamp Switch Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Headlight Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 Headlight Housing, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Headlight Lamp Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Heel Pocket, Remove and Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 Hub Carrier, Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.26 Hub Carrier, Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25 Hub Carrier, Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.27 Hub Carrier, Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.25 I Idle Speed Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12 Ignition System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10 Ignition System Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9 Ignition, Cranking Output Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 Ignition, DC/CDI Ignition Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8 Ignition, Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10 Ignition, Testing Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9 Ignition, Timing Check Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 Indicator Lamp Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.5, 7.18 Indicator Lamp, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 J Jet Part Numbers, Mikuni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 Jetting Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 L Load Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.16 M Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Maintenance Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 Maintenance References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 Master Cylinder, Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11 Master Cylinder, Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10 N Neutral / Reverse Switch Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Neutral Start Diode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18 O Oil and Filter Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Level, Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Pressure Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Pump Priming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.15 3.11 3.12 2.14 3.10 3.10 3.11 RepairPro Service Manual Oil Pump Priming Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.16 P Paint Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Periodic Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Piston Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 Piston Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17 Piston Ring Installed Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.44 Piston to Cylinder Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43 Piston/Rod Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18 Pre-Ride / Daily Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10 Pre-Ride Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 Publication Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 R Radiator Cap Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 Radiator, Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.18 Rear Brake Caliper Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 Rear Brake System, Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 Rear Cab, Remove and Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 Rear Housing, Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.23 Rear Housing, Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.21 Rear Housing, Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.19 Rear Housing, Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.24 Rear Housing, Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.20 Rear Suspension, Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.16 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Reverse Lock-Out Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19 S Serial Number (VIN) Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Shock Compression Adjustment, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.29 Shock, Front, Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.32 Shock, Piston Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.34 Shock, Rear, Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.33 Shocks, Front / Rear Standard Valving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.34 Shocks, RydeFX Service Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.35 Side Panel, Remove and Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 Sparkplug, Inspection and Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24 Special Tool, Rear Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.22 Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.6, 3.6, 4.4 Special Tools, Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 Special Tools, Detailed Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7 Special Tools, Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 Special Tools, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 Special Tools, Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 Special Tools, Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 Specification, A-Arm Fastener Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.15 Specification, Brake Lever Freeplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30 Specification, Brake Pad Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30 Specification, Cam Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16 Specification, Chain Wear Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20 Specification, Crankshaft Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20 Specification, CV Joint Grease Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.30 Specification, Cylinder Head Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42 Specification, Cylinder Taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43 Specification, Cylinder Warp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42 Specification, Drive Chain Wear Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.20 Specification, Float Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12 Specification, Flywheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20 Specification, Handle Bar Fastener Torque . . . . . . . . . .2.25 Specification, Hub Carrier Fastener Torque . . . . . 5.25, 5.27 Specification, Hub Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.27 Specification, Idle Speed RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12 Specification, Oil Filter Cover Bolt Torque . . . . . . . . . .2.16 Specification, Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 Specification, Oil Tank Drain Plug Torque . . . . . . . . . .2.15 Specification, Pilot Screw Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12 Specification, Piston Ring Installed Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.44 Specification, Radiator Cap Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 Specification, Spark Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24 Specification, Sparkplug Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24 Specification, Sparkplug Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.24 Specification, Tensioner Bolt Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15 Specification, Thermistor Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 Specification, Throttle Lever Freeplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13 Specification, Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.31 Specification, Tire Wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.31 Specification, Valve Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.41 Specification, Valve Guide Installed Height . . . . . . . . . . 3.37 Specification, Valve Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38 Specification, Valve Spring Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36 Specification, Valve Stem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39 Specification, Wheel and Hub Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.30 Specification, Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.27 Specifications, Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 Specifications, Brakes Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 Specifications, Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 Specifications, Detailed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.5 Specifications, Engine Fastener Torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 Specifications, ES50PL Engine Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 Specifications, Front Suspension Fastener Torque . . . . . . 5.3 Specifications, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 Specifications, Piston and Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17 Specifications, Rear Suspension Fastener Torque . . . . . . 5.3 Specifications, Steering Component Fastener Torque . . . 5.3 Sprocket Inspection, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.19 Starter Armature Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.19 Starter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.20 Starter Brushes, Inspection and Replacement . . . . . . . . . 7.19 Starter Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18 Starter Motor Armature Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.19 Starter Motor Brush Inspection/Replacement . . . . . . . . . 7.19 Starter One-Way Clutch Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.20 Starter Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.20 Starter System Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21 Starter System Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21 Starter Voltage Drop Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18 Starting Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20 Starting System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17 Steering Assembly, Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 Steering Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.26 IX.3 IX Steering Knuckle, Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . . .5.8 Steering, Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.24 Steering, Toe Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.27 Suspension, Spring Preload Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.27 T Tail Lamp, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.4 Taillight Lamp Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.4 Tank Cover, Remove and Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.5 Tap / Drill Sizes, Metric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.10 Tap / Drill Sizes, SAE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.10 Temperature Sensor Operation/Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.11 Tether Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.6 Tether Switch, Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.6 Throttle Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.12 Timing Check Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.2 Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.31 Toe Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.27 Torque Patterns, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.6 Torque Specifications, Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.3 Transmission Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.26 Troubleshooting, Brake Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.6 Troubleshooting, Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.24 Troubleshooting, Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.48 Troubleshooting, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.46 Troubleshooting, Ignition System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.7 Troubleshooting, Spark Plug Fouling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.48 Troubleshooting, Starter System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.17 U Unit Model Number Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2 V Valve Shim Adjustment Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.40 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.2 Voltage Drop Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7.18 W Water Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.44 Water Pump Seal Removal and Installation . . . . . . . . . .3.45 Water Pump Shaft Oil Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.44 Wheel Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.25 Wheel Removal, Front or Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.30 IX.4 RepairPro Service Manual WIRE DIAGRAM OUTLAW 500 8.1 WIRE DIAGRAM OUTLAW 500 8.2 RepairPro Service Manual WIRE DIAGRAM OUTLAW 500 8.3
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Encryption : Standard V2.3 (128-bit) User Access : Print, Extract, Print high-res Page Mode : UseOutlines XMP Toolkit : 3.1-702 About : uuid:5dd75d09-0c16-11db-bbd2-001451116152 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 6.0 (Windows) Creator Tool : FrameMaker 7.1 Modify Date : 2006:10:31 20:49:27-05:00 Create Date : 2006:06:28 10:11:01Z Metadata Date : 2006:10:31 20:49:27-05:00 Document ID : uuid:09c95583-dce5-424c-833e-299eff1da4cc Instance ID : uuid:7510aa57-1de8-40f8-84e1-a9d656dd7c10 Format : application/pdf Title : Polaris Outlaw 500 Creator : RepairPro Has XFA : No Page Count : 202 Page Layout : SinglePage Author : RepairProEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools